Panasonic | DMREH55 | Operating instructions | Panasonic DMREH55 Operating Instructions

9:28 PM
Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
DMR-EH55
Convenient
functions
Copying
Editing
Playing back
Recording
Model No.
Getting started
EH55English.book Page 1 Thursday, April 6, 2006
Dear customer
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read
the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
PC
The warranty can be found on page 78.
1
2
The warranty can be found on page 79.
La referencia rápida en español se puede encontrar
en la página 80.
≥The region number of this unit is “1”.
≥The unit will play DVDs marked with labels containing “1” or
“ALL”.
Example:
P
[For\U.S.A.]only]
4
This manual was printed with soy based ink.
RQT8365-P
Español
Region numbers are allocated to DVD players and DVD-Video
according to where they are sold.
ALL
In the U.S.A.: 1-800-211-PANA(7262)
In Canada:
1-800-561-5505
[For\Canada]only]
Region number supported by this unit
1
If you have any questions contact
Reference
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance
and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
EH55English.book Page 2 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN
MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER
MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION VENTS.
WARNING:
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC
SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,
DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO
OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS
VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for
proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground
shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and
easily accessible. The mains plug of the power supply cord shall
remain readily operable. To completely disconnect this apparatus
from the AC Mains, disconnect the power supply cord plug from
AC receptacle.
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.
FCC Note:
(Inside of product)
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE SCREWS.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user
to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”
within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock
to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
≥Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
≥Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
≥Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
≥Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Caution: To assure continued compliance, follow the
attached installation instructions and use only shielded interface
cables when connecting to peripheral devices.
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Responsible Party:
Panasonic Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
Telephone No.: 1-800-211-7262
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
RQT8365
2
Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit. Follow the safety instructions on the unit and the applicable safety instructions
listed below. Keep these operating instructions handy for future reference.
1) Read these instructions.
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
2) Keep these instructions.
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
3) Heed all warnings.
where they exit from the apparatus.
4) Follow all instructions.
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
manufacturer.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
avoid injury from tip-over.
produce heat.
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or groundingwhen unused for long periods of time.
type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is
the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third
required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus
your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
obsolete outlet.
normally, or has been dropped.
EH55English.book Page 3 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Getting started
Editing
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
HDD, disc and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Disc and card handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Inserting/Removing the SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
The remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Connecting with an HDMI
(High Definition Multimedia Interface) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Control with HDMI (HDAVI ControlTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
STEP 2 Setting up the TV Guide On ScreenTM
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
STEP 3 Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
STEP 4 Set up to match your television and the unit’s
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Recording
Recording television programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Recording television programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To specify a time to stop recording
—One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting audio to record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
26
26
27
27
Scheduled recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
TM
Using the TV Guide On Screen system to make scheduled
recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually programming scheduled recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using VCR Plusi system to make scheduled recordings. . . .
Check, change or delete a program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
29
29
30
Utilizing the TV Guide On ScreenTM system . . . . . . . . .31
Using the LISTINGS Service to set scheduled recording and
scheduled reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the SEARCH Service to search TV programs by genre,
keyword, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using SETUP Service to change the settings
of the TV Guide On ScreenTM system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using SCHEDULE Service to check, change or delete a
program set for scheduled recording or scheduled reminder
manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
33
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Creating playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing and playing playlists/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playlist operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
47
47
47
Editing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Album and picture operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Copying
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying using the copying list—Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R and +R DL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures from an SD card . . . . . . . . .
50
50
52
52
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
DV camcorder recording (DV Camcorder Rec.) . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Copying all the still pictures on a card
—Copy all Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Convenient functions
HDD, disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the protection—Disc Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Providing a name for a disc—Disc Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete All Titles . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all the contents of a disc or card—Format . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the background style—Top Menu Style . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first
—Playback will start with:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalize . . .
Creating Top Menu—Create DVD Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
56
56
57
57
58
58
58
58
34
35
Common procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Summary of settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Changing the speaker setting to suit your speakers . . . . . . . . . 63
Channel/Clock settings when TV Guide On ScreenTM
system is not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only
discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
37
38
38
38
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures
(JPEG/TIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Selecting file type to play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing DivX discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing MP3 discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Useful functions during still picture play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Title operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Playing back
Operations during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simple editing operations during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Table of contents
Table of contents
39
39
40
40
41
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Delete Navigator to delete titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Deleting titles or pictures during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Auto channel/clock settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Channel captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
VCR Plusr Channel Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Reference
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Product Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR U.S.A.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR CANADA) . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Guía de referencia rápida en español . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
(Spanish Quick Reference)
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backcover
RQT8365
3
EH55English.book Page 4 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
HDD, disc and card information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
DVD-RAM
≥4.7 GB/9.4 GB, 12 cm (5z)
≥2.8 GB, 8 cm (3z)
Hard disk drive (HDD)
≥200 GB
Disc type
Logo
–
Indicated in these
instructions by
[HDD]
[RAM]
DVD Video Recording format
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit television broadcasts and so on.
≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
Recording format
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Still pictures
Video
Still pictures
Yes
Yes
–
Only on DVD-RAM compatible players.
(It is not possible to finalize the disc.)
–
Up to 5X recording speed discs.
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
Yes
Yes [CPRM (➡ 76) compatible discs only.]
Recording both Main and
SAP for MTS broadcasts§4
Yes§5
Yes§5
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
Yes§5
Yes§5
Yes
Yes
Re-writable
Play on other players
§2
Usable high speed
recording disc type§3
What you can do on this unit
Creating and editing
playlists
DVD-R
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm (5z)
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm (3z)
Disc type
DVD-R DL
(dual layer on single side)
≥You cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8).
DVD-RW
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm (5z)
≥1.4 GB, 8 cm (3z)
Logo
Indicated in these
instructions by
[-R] before finalization
[-R]DL] before finalization
[-RW‹V›] before finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
DVD-Video format
Recording format
This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-Video.
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
Data that can be recorded
and played
Re-writable§1
Play on other players§2
Usable high speed
recording disc type§3
Video
Video
Video
No
No
Yes
Only after finalizing the disc
(➡ 58, 76).
Only on DVD-R DL compatible
players after finalizing the disc
(➡ 58, 76).
Only after finalizing the disc
(➡ 58, 76).
Up to 16X recording speed discs.
Up to 4X recording speed discs.
Up to 6X recording speed discs.
No
No
No
No
[Only one is recorded. ➡ 62, Multichannel TV Sound ( MTS )]
No
[Only one is recorded. ➡ 62, Multichannel TV Sound ( MTS )]
No
[Only one is recorded. ➡ 62, Multichannel TV Sound ( MTS )]
What you can do on this unit
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
Recording both Main and
SAP for MTS broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
Creating and editing
playlists
No
No
No
(The picture is recorded in 4:3 aspect.) (The picture is recorded in 4:3 aspect.) (The picture is recorded in 4:3 aspect.)
No
No
No
RQT8365
4
(continued on the next page)
9:28 PM
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(continued)
+R DL
(double layer on single side)
≥You cannot directly record to a
+R DL disc on this unit (➡ 8).
+R§6
≥4.7 GB, 12 cm (5z)
Disc type
Logo
Indicated in these
instructions by
–
–
[+R] before finalization
[+R]DL] before finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
[DVD-V] after finalization
+RW
–
[+RW]
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format
Recording format
HDD, disc and card information
EH55English.book Page 5 Thursday, April 6, 2006
This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.
You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.
≥Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be recorded.
≥After finalizing the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the disc on DVD players and other equipment.
Data that can be recorded
and played
Video
Re-writable§1
Play on other players§2
Usable high speed
recording disc type§3
Video
Video
No
No
Yes
Only after finalizing the disc
(➡ 58, 76).
Only on +R DL compatible players
after finalizing the disc (➡ 58, 76).
Yes
(It is not possible to finalize the disc.)
Up to 16X recording speed discs.
Up to 2.4X recording speed discs.
Up to 4X recording speed discs.§7
No
No
No
What you can do on this unit
Recording broadcasts that
allow one copy
Recording both Main and
SAP for MTS broadcasts§4
Recording 16:9 aspect
picture§4
No
[Only one is recorded. ➡ 62, Multichannel TV Sound ( MTS )]
No
[Only one is recorded. ➡ 62, Multichannel TV Sound ( MTS )]
No
[Only one is recorded. ➡ 62, Multichannel TV Sound ( MTS )]
No
No
No
(The picture is recorded in 4:3 aspect.) (The picture is recorded in 4:3 aspect.) (The picture is recorded in 4:3 aspect.)
Creating and editing playlists
No
No
No
§1
The amount of the recordable disc space doesn’t increase even if the program is deleted when you use one time recording disc.
(➡ 25, Recording modes and approximate recording times)
§2
[RAM] Can be played on Panasonic DVD recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.
If you play a DVD-R DL or +R DL, use compatible equipment.
§3
The high-speed recording discs listed here are compatible with this unit. However, this is not the copy speed.
§4
For further information (➡ 8, Important notes for recording)
§5
When “Enable High-Speed Mode” is set to “Off” (➡ 61). ( The default setting is “On”. )
§6 +R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with another Panasonic DVD recorder may be incompatible. However, discs that are
finalized are compatible and can be played.
§7 You can play 8X recording speed discs recorded on another equipment.
≥We recommend using Panasonic discs and cards. We also recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches and dirt.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the discs and you may not be able to play them due to the condition of the recording.
≥You cannot record programs that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R and DVD-RW on this unit. You can record other
programs as DVD-Video format.
[Note]
When “Enable High-Speed Mode” is set to “On”, the restrictions on secondary audio recording etc. are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this setting
“Off” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a program (➡ 61). ( The default setting is “On”. )
Finalize
A process that makes play of a recorded disc possible on equipment that can play such media. After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit. (➡ 58)
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making a disc (such as DVD-RAM, etc.) recordable on recording equipment. (➡ 57)
You cannot directly record to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is not enough
space on the first layer to record a program, the remaining portion of the program is recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal program. However,
video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
∫ Recording modes and approximate recording times ➡ 25
Discs that cannot be played
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm (5z)
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R recorded in DVD Video Recording format
≥DVD-R (DVD-Video format), DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL recorded on another unit and not finalized (➡ 76).
≥PAL discs (you can still play the audio on DVD-Audio)
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “1” or “ALL”
≥Blu-ray
≥DVD-ROM, +R 8 cm (3z), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, etc.
Note about using a DualDisc
The digital audio content side of a DualDisc does not meet the technical specifications of the Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) format so play
may not be possible.
RQT8365
5
EH55English.book Page 6 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
HDD, disc and card information
Play-only discs [12 cm (5z)/8 cm (3z)]
Disc type
DVD-Video
DVD-Audio
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)
Logo
Indicated in these
[DVD-V]
[DVD-A]
[-RW‹VR›]
instructions by
Instructions
High quality movie and music discs High fidelity music
DVD-RW recorded on another DVD Recorder
discs
≥You can play programs that allow “One time only recording” if
≥Played on this unit
they have been recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (➡ 57) the disc, you can record to it in DVDin 2 channels.
Video format and play it on this unit.
≥It may be necessary to finalize the disc on the equipment used
for recording.
.
Disc type
DVD-R
CD
Video CD
Logo
–
Indicated in these
DivX
instructions by
§
Instructions
≥DVD-R with video
recorded in DivX
[CD]
DivX, MP3, JPEG/TIFF
[VCD]
Recorded music and
Recorded audio and music ≥CD-R and CD-RW with video
recorded in DivX
video (including CD-R/
(including CD-R/RW§)
≥CD-R and CD-RW§ with music
RW§)
recorded in MP3 (➡ 40)
≥CD-R and CD-RW§ with still pictures
recorded in JPEG and TIFF
§
§
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Regarding DVD-Audio
Some manufacturers do not allow down-mixing, therefore some multi-channel DVD-Audio will prevent down-mixing (➡ 76) of all or part of their
contents. Tracks that are prevented from being down-mixed will not play properly on this unit (e.g. audio is played from the front two channels
only). Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
Cards you can use on this unit
SD Memory Card
miniSDTM Card§
MultiMediaCard
Type
Indicated in these
instructions by
[SD]
Data that can be
recorded and played
Instructions
Still pictures
Video (MPEG2)
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
§A miniSDTM card adaptor included with the miniSDTM card is necessary.
≥You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera, etc. (➡ 40, 54).
≥You can set the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) for automatic printing on your home printer or at a photo
developing store (➡ 48, 76).
≥MPEG2 moving pictures shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
(➡ 52)
≥MPEG2 moving pictures cannot be played directly from the SD card.
Compatible with: FAT12 or FAT16
Suitable SD Memory Cards
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with the following capacities (from 8 MB to 2 GB).
8 MB,
128 MB,
RQT8365
6
16 MB,
256 MB,
32 MB,
512 MB,
64 MB,
1 GB,
2 GB (Maximum)
≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs
(This site is in English only.)
≥If the SD Memory Card is formatted on other equipment, the time used for recording may become longer. Also if the SD Memory Card is formatted
on a PC, you may not be able to use it on this unit.
In these cases, format the card on this unit (➡ 57, 76).
≥This unit supports SD Memory Cards formatted in FAT12 system and FAT16 system based on SD Memory Card Specifications.
≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
9:28 PM
Regarding DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
DivX
Playable
discs
[-R] [CD]
File
format
DivX
≥Files must have the extension
“.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.
Number
of folders
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders
(including the root folder)
Number
of files
Maximum number of DivX files recognizable§1 :
200 files
Support
version
DivX ver.3.11, 4.x, 5.x
Video
–Number of stream: Up to 1
–Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
–Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
–FPS(Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
–Number of stream: Up to 8
–Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3
–Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch
conversion.
≥GMC (Global Motion Compensation) is not supported.
MP3
Playable
discs
[CD]
File
format
MP3
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
Number
of folders
(groups)
Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable:
99 folders (groups) (including the root folder)
Number
of files
(tracks)
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1 :
999 files (tracks)
Bit rates
32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling
frequency
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz
ID3 tags
not compatible
[CD]
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats), Joliet
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you
numbered them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥Compatible formats: DCF§3 compliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)
§3 Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on how
you create the disc (writing software), play may not be in the
order you numbered the folders.
[CD]
Structure of MP3 folders
Prefix with 3-digit numbers
in the order you want to play
them.
HDD, disc and card information
EH55English.book Page 7 Thursday, April 6, 2006
Root
001
001 (folder=group)
001track.mp3 (file=track)
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
002 group
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
003 group
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Order of play
[CD]
Structures of still pictures
Files inside a folder are displayed
in the order they were updated or
taken.
≥When the highest level folders
are “DCIM” folders, they are
displayed first on the tree.
Root
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
001
002 Folder
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
003 Folder
004 Folder
Order of play
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
Still pictures (JPEG, TIFF§2)
Playable
discs and
cards
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] [CD]
File
format
JPEG, TIFF (non-compressed RGB chunky format)
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg”, “.JPG”, “.tif” or
“.TIF”.
Number
of pixels
between 34k34 and 6144k4096 pixels
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
Number
of folders
[CD] Maximum number of folders recognizable: 99
folders (including the root folder)
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
300 folders (including higher folders)
Number
of files
[CD] Maximum number of files recognizable§1 :
999 files
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
3000 files
MOTION
JPEG
not compatible
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS” and “DTS 2.0 i Digital Out” are trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
U.S. patent Nos. 4,631,603, 4,577,216, 4,819,098, and 4,907,093.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Official DivX Certified™ product.
Plays DivX® 5, DivX® 4, DivX® 3, and DivX® VOD video content (in
compliance with DivX Certified™ technical requirements).
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivXNetworks, Inc. and are used under license.
≥SD logo is a trademark.
≥miniSD™ is a trademark of SD Card Association.
≥Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and
are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
§1
Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and
other type of files is 4000.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
§2
Operation may take time to complete when playing TIFF format
still pictures, or when there are many files and/or folders, some
files may not display or be playable.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial
Co., Ltd.
RQT8365
7
EH55English.book Page 8 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Important notes for recording
Recording of
MTS
broadcasting
[HDD] [RAM]
Both Main and SAP audio can be recorded.
You can change the audio during playback. (➡ 38,
Changing audio during play)
However in the following cases, select to record the Main
or SAP audio:
–Recording or copying sound in LPCM (➡ 62, Audio for
XP Recording)
–“Enable High-Speed Mode” is set to “On”
( The default setting is “On”. ➡ 61)
Main
SAP
Hello
Hola
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Select the Main or SAP audio before recording or copying
[➡ 62, Multi-channel TV Sound ( MTS )].
The selected audio only is recorded or copied.
Main
Hello
≥If you record from external equipment
–Select “Main” or “SAP” on the external equipment.
≥If you record from external equipment
–Select both “Main” and “SAP” on the external
equipment.
Recording of
Widescreen
broadcasting
[HDD] [RAM]
Recorded in 16:9 aspect (Widescreen)§
§
When “Enable High-Speed Mode” is set to “Off”
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Recorded or copied in 4:3 aspect
≥When “Enable High-Speed Mode” is set to “On”,
16:9 aspect programs are recorded in 4:3 aspect.
( The default setting is “On”. ➡ 61)
Copying titles
in high speed
mode from
the HDD to
DVD-R, etc.
Set “Enable High-Speed Mode” to “On” before recording to the HDD (➡ 61).
( The default setting is “On”. )
You can copy titles in high speed mode (➡ 49); however, the above settings are necessary before recording to the HDD.
Record to the HDD
HDD
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
Recording of
digital
broadcasting
It is not possible to record digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW or 8 cm
(3z) DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (➡ 76) compatible DVD-RAM.
[HDD] [RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They are deleted
from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.
Playing the
disc on other
DVD players
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The disc must be finalized after recording or copying (➡ 58).
It is necessary to finalize DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them as a
commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.§
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Play on other DVD equipment
CHG
Í /I
Í
DOUBLE RE-MASTER CD SEQUENTIAL
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
∫
;
1
:/6
5/9
DISC EXCHANGE
DISC SKIP
<OPEN/CLOSE
SEARCH
ENTER
VOL
DISPLAY
TOP
Finalize
MENU
RETURN
MENU
ON
OFF
DC
IN
9V
OPEN
UND
A.SURRO
REPEAT
MODE
MONITOR
MODE
PICTURE
[+RW]
We recommend you to create the menu before playing a +RW disc on other equipment. (➡ 58)
Recording to
DVD-R DL
and +R DL
RQT8365
8
You cannot directly record to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
≥It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.
≥It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.
EH55English.book Page 9 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC power plug from the household AC outlet.
In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
saving recorded content to a disc.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer become usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem,
copy all content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on an HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
≥When the HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode (➡ below), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.
This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
∫ Setup precautions
≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
≥Do not place on anything that generates
heat like a video cassette recorder, etc.
This unit
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
VCR
≥Place in an area where condensation does
not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon where moisture forms
on a cold surface when there is an extreme change in temperature.
Condensation may cause internal damage to the unit.
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
–When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from a
very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when
subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly impacts
the unit.) When the HDD (warms during operation) is subjected to
cold air, condensation may form on the inside of the HDD and may
cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.
–When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
–During the rainy season.
∫ Cigarette smoke, etc. causes malfunction or
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor, etc.
gets inside the unit.
∫ While operating
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD
may become damaged.)
≥Do not remove the AC power plug from the household AC outlet, or
flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
Important notes for recording/HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)
2 Remove the AC power plug from the household AC outlet.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx. 2
minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock. (Even
after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a short
time.)
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
∫ HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist
will not increase the amount of time.)
∫ When “SLEEP” appears in the display
The HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode. (The HDD continues to rotate at high speed while the unit is on. In order to extend
the life of the HDD, the HDD will be placed in the SLEEP mode if no operation has been performed for 30 minutes while there is no disc on the
disc tray.)
≥While in SLEEP mode play or recording may not begin right away because the HDD takes time to be re-activated.
≥When not using the unit, we recommend removing the disc in the tray in order to set the HDD to the SLEEP mode.
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
RQT8365
9
EH55English.book Page 10 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Disc and card handling
∫ How to hold a disc or card
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other
strange things.
≥Do not drop, stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
–Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
–Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
–Irregularly shaped discs, such as
heart shapes.
Do not touch the recorded
surface or the terminal
surface.
∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs
Be careful about scratches and dirt.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe
dry.
∫ Handling precautions
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
–In direct sunlight.
–In very dusty or humid areas.
–Near a heater.
–Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
–Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
or cartridges when you are not using them.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem
with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by
such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner (RP-CL720PP) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
[Note]
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
Inserting/Removing the SD card
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or remove the card.
Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s contents.
≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB (➡ 6).
Opening the cover
Inserting the card
Press the protruding
Press on the center of
part to open the cover.
the card until it clicks into
place.
Removing the card
If you are using a
miniSDTM card, insert it
into the miniSDTM card
adaptor that comes
with the card.
Insert and remove this
adaptor from the unit.
Closing the cover
1 Press on the center
of the card.
2 Pull it straight out.
ADAPTER
Insert the card label up with the cut-off
corner on the right.
(Do not forget to close the cover. ➡ right)
Automatic drive select function
≥If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card Operations” screen is displayed. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press
[ENTER] to switch to the SD drive ( ➡ 40, 54).
If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.
RQT8365
10
Keep the small memory cards such as the SD Memory Card out of reach of children. If swallowed, seek
medical advice immediately.
EH55English.book Page 11 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
∏
Please check and identify the supplied accessories. Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement parts.
(Product numbers correct as of March 2006. These may be subject to change.)
Only for U.S.A.: To order accessories, refer to “Accessory Purchases” on page 78.
Only for Canada: To order accessories, call the dealer from whom you have made your purchase.
∏
∏
∏
1 Remote control
(EUR7659YR0)
1 AC power supply
cord
(K2CB2CB00018)
≥For use with this
unit only. Do not use
it with other
equipment.
Also, do not use
cords for other
equipment with this
unit.
1 75 ≠ coaxial
cable
(K2KZ2BA00001)
∏
∏
∏
1 Audio/video
cable
(K2KA6BA00003)
1 IR Blaster
(K2ZZ04C00001)
1 DVD-RAM disc
2 Batteries
for remote control
(U.S.A. only)
Product Registration Card
Please complete and return the included product registration card, or register via the Internet at: http://www.prodreg.com/panasonic/
The model number and serial number of this product can be
found on either the back or the bottom of the unit.
Please note them in the space provided below and keep for
future reference.
MODEL NUMBER
DMR-EH55
User memo:
DATE OF PURCHASE _______________________________
DEALER NAME ____________________________________
DEALER ADDRESS _________________________________
__________________________________________________
TELEPHONE NUMBER ______________________________
SERIAL NUMBER
Disc and card handling/Unit care/Inserting/Removing the SD card/Accessories/The remote control
Accessories
The remote control
∫ Batteries
∫ Use
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
≥When closing the lid, insert it from the j (minus) side.
Remote control signal sensor
20
30
R6/LR6, AA
≥Do not use rechargeable type batteries.
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
20
30
7 m (23 feet) directly in front of the unit
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove batteries if the remote control is not going to be used for a
long period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Remote control operations (➡ 12)
[Note]
If you cannot operate the unit or television using the remote control
after changing the batteries, please re-enter the codes (➡ 23).
RQT8365
11
EH55English.book Page 12 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Control reference guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.
>
DVD
1
2
3
4
POWER
TV
Í
POWER
Í
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
PAUSE
<
=
VCR Plus
Plusi
A
DELETE
B
C
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
SCHEDULE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
TV GUIDE
ENTER
SUB MENU
DISPLAY
A
CREATE
CHAPTER
RETURN
G
H
I
Info
B
REC
D
E
F
S
AUDIO
@
TIONS
FUNC
8
9
:
;
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
7
?
PAGE
5
6
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
J
K
Turn the unit on (➡ 20)
Select drive (HDD, DVD or SD) (➡ 24, 36, 40)
Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
Cancel
Basic operations for recording and play
Skip the specified time (➡ 38)
Show Direct Navigator/Top menu (➡ 36, 37, 39, 44)
Selection/Enter, Frame-by-frame (➡ below)
Show sub menu (➡ 31, 44)
Show on-screen menu (➡ 42)
“B” button for Direct Navigator (➡ 40)
Select audio (➡ 27, 38)
“A” button for Direct Navigator (➡ 36)
Start recording (➡ 24)/Specify the time to stop recording (➡ 26)
Change recording mode (➡ 24)
Transmit the remote control signal
Television operations (➡ 23)
Channel select/Change pages in the TV GUIDE system
(➡ 24, 28)
Show VCR Plusr screen (➡ 29)
Delete items (➡ 43)
Input select (IN1, IN2, IN3 or DV) (➡ 53)
Show scheduled recording list (➡ 29)
Show program listings
(TV Guide On ScreenTM system) (➡ 28)
Show FUNCTIONS window (➡ below)
Return to previous screen
Create chapters (➡ 38)
Changing the size of information window/Displays help
information (➡ 31)
Skip a minute forward (➡ 38)
Show status messages (➡ 38)
∫ Using the cursor
≥Select items on menu screens and set items.
Press up, down, left, or right to select an item.
You can also move frame by frame (backward/forward).
While paused, press [2;] or [;1] (left/right).
ENTER
Press [ENTER] to confirm.
Shared operations when [FUNCTIONS] is pressed.
By using the FUNCTIONS window you may access the main functions
quickly and easily. For example, when you want to delete a title with
Delete Navigator, or copy a title with Copy Navigator, etc. (➡ 43, 50)
1
2
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
Available Space : 79:36 SP
HDD
Playback
Program
Delete
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of disc.
RQT8365
12
Press [3, 4] to select an item and
press [ENTER].
If you select “Other Functions”, press [3, 4] to select an
item and press [ENTER].
9:28 PM
Control reference guide
EH55English.book Page 13 Thursday, April 6, 2006
Main unit
1
4
3
2
6
5
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE
k1.3
1.3
CH
DV IN
7
REC
DRIVE
SELECT
S VIDEO VIDEO L/MONO-AUDIO-R
IN2
9
8
: ;
<
=
Opening the front panel
Press down on the
part with your finger.
8 Channel select (➡ 24)
9 Open/close disc tray (➡ 24, 36)
: Select drive (➡ 24, 36, 40)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
; Stop (➡ 24, 37)
< Start play (➡ 36)
= Start recording (➡ 24)
Specify the time to stop recording (➡ 26)
1 POWER button (POWER Í/I) (➡ 20)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
2 Disc tray (➡ below)
3 Connector for a digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 53)
4 SD card slot (➡ 10)
5 Display (➡ below)
6 Remote control signal sensor
7 Connectors for external equipment (➡ 53)
Rear panel terminals (➡ 14–19)
How to insert a disc
∫ Non-cartridge disc
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to open the tray and
insert a disc. (Press the button again to close the tray.)
≥When using 8 cm (3″ ) DVD-RAM or 8 cm (3″ ) DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
≥It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a
double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and
turn it over.
Automatic drive select function
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge set to
“PROTECT” (➡ 56, Cartridge-protection) ] [DVD-V] [DVD-A] [VCD] [CD]
≥If the unit is stopped or recording to the HDD, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
∫ Cartridge disc
Insert label-up.
Insert with the
arrow facing in.
Insert fully
The unit’s display
1
2
REC
3
PLAY
4
5
6
1
Recording
REC
Playback
PLAY
Recording/Playback
REC
PLAY
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
Scheduled recording indicator
Lights when an SD card is inserted in the SD card slot.
Lights when the HDD, DVD or SD drive is selected.
Main display section
Recording mode
Lights up when a disc that is supported by this unit is inserted.
RQT8365
13
EH55English.book Page 14 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
STEP 1 Connection
This section includes diagrams of six common methods of connection (A–F, pages 14–16). Please connect using the one that best suits you.
≥Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about connection methods. (This is in English only.)
http://www.panasonic.com/consumer_electronics/dvd_recorder/dvd_connection.asp
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
When using a cable service or satellite service.
≥You need to subscribe to a cable TV or satellite service to enjoy viewing their programming.
≥Consult your service provider regarding an appropriate cable box or satellite receiver.
∫ RF OUT terminal
Connect the unit directly to the television
(Connection B, D, F)
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or video cassette
recorder to the television, video signals will be affected by
copyright protection systems and the picture may not be shown
correctly.
The picture and sound signal from this unit does not go through the
RF OUT terminal to the television.
Make sure you connect one of the following terminals on this unit to
the television: the AUDIO/VIDEO OUT terminal, the S VIDEO OUT
terminal, the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal or HDMI AV OUT
terminal.
≥Refer to page 18 if the antenna connectors don’t match.
∫ When the unit is not to be used for a long time
Television
.
To save power, unplug it from the household AC outlet. This unit
consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off
(approx. 13.5 W).
VCR
Note that the program listings are not downloaded while the
unit is unplugged.
This unit
A
Connection with a television
≥If your television does not have
AUDIO/VIDEO terminals
(➡ 17, a).
≥If you would like to enjoy higher
picture quality. (➡ 18, 19)
Cable from the
wall or antenna
signal
75 ≠ coaxial
cable
1
AUDIO IN
R L VIDEO IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Red White Yellow
3
2
75 ≠ coaxial cable
(included)
Audio/Video cable (included)
RF
IN
AV OUT
OPTICAL
IN3
OUT2
PR
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
To a household AC
outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
IN1
PB
OUT1
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
This unit
Y
Red White Yellow
RF OUT
Television
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
G-LINK
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
4
AC power supply cord (included)
Connect only after all other connections are complete.
B
Connection with a television and a video cassette recorder
The connection will allow the video cassette recorder to be used for playback and recording when this unit is turned off.
Cable from the
wall or antenna
signal
≥If your television does not have
AUDIO/VIDEO terminals
(➡ 17, b).
≥If you would like to enjoy higher
picture quality. (➡ 18, 19)
AUDIO IN
R L VIDEO IN
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Television
Red White Yellow
75 ≠ coaxial
cable
1
4
3
Audio/Video cable (included)
RF
IN
Red White Yellow
AV OUT
PR
OPTICAL
IN3
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
AC IN
Red
White Yellow
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO S VIDEO
RQT8365
14
G-LINK
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
Audio/Video
cable
75 ≠ coaxial
cable
(included)
2
To a household
AC outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
IN1
PB
OUT2
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
This unit
Y
OUT1
RF OUT
75 ≠ coaxial cable
VHF/UHF
RF IN
IN
OUT
VHF/UHF
RF OUT
5
OUT
Yellow
White
Red
Video cassette recorder
6
IN
VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
IN
AUDIO
L
AUDIO
L
AUDIO
R
AUDIO
R
AC power supply cord
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
EH55English.book Page 15 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
C
STEP 1 Connection
DirecTV/DISH Network service is only available in the United States and is not available or supported in
Canada.
Connection with a television and a cable box or DirecTV receiver
Cable from the
Satellite
antenna (satellite wall or antenna
signal
receiver only)
1
2
4
RF
IN
Red White Yellow
These connections to
IN3 are required for the
TV Guide On ScreenTM
system to work.
Audio/Video cable (included)
This unit
Y
OUT1
Red White Yellow
PB
AV OUT
PR
OPTICAL
IN3
OUT2
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
RF OUT
Television
VHF/UHF
RF IN
IN1
75 ≠ coaxial
cable
AUDIO IN
R L VIDEO IN
≥If your television does not have
AUDIO/VIDEO terminals
(➡ 17, d).
≥If you would like to enjoy higher
picture quality. (➡ 18, 19)
IN3
R-AUDIO-L
5
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
75 ≠ coaxial
cable
(included)
75 ≠ coaxial cable
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO S VIDEO
Red
White Yellow
G-LINK
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
3
6
Audio/Video
cable
7
IR Blaster
(included)
See below
Red White Yellow OUT
IN
Satellite
Cable
R
L
AUDIO
RF
VIDEO
AC power supply cord
(included)
Connect only after all
other connections are
complete.
8
To a household AC outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
S-VIDEO
Cable box or DirecTV receiver
D
Connection with a television, a video cassette recorder and a cable box or DirecTV receiver
The connection will allow the video cassette recorder to be used for playback and recording when this unit is turned off.
Television
≥If your television does not
have AUDIO/VIDEO
terminals (➡ 17, c).
≥If you would like to enjoy
higher picture quality.
(➡ 18, 19)
AUDIO IN
R L VIDEO IN
75 ≠ coaxial cable
3
VHF/UHF
RF OUT
4
RF
IN
8
PB
Audio/Video cable
AUDIO
R
AU
This unit
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
5
AC IN
Red White Yellow
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
G-LINK
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
These connections to IN3 are
required for the TV Guide On
ScreenTM system to work.
6
7
Audio/Video
cable
AC power supply cord
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
10
75 ≠ coaxial cable (included)
Red White Yellow OUT
IN
Satellite
AU
AV OUT
75 ≠ coaxial cable
75 ≠ coaxial cable
VID
I
AUDIO
L
OUT
IN3
VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
OUT
Red White Yellow
PR
IN3
R-AUDIO-L
2
IN1
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
Yellow
White
Red
Y
Red White Yellow
OUT2
RF OUT
OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
OUT1
1
Cable
from the
wall or
antenna
signal
Video cassette recorder
IN
Red White Yellow
Audio/Video
cable (included)
Satellite
antenna
(satellite
receiver
only)
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Cable
75 ≠ coaxial cable
RF
R
L
AUDIO
Cable box or DirecTV receiver
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
9
IR Blaster (included)
See below
To a household AC outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
Why should I connect the IR Blaster?
The IR Blaster is necessary for operating a cable box or DirecTV receiver with this unit’s remote control. Additionally, if the IR Blaster is
not correctly connected or set up, you cannot make scheduled recordings or download program listings.
Setting the IR Blaster
Place the IR Blaster in front of the signal sensor of the cable box or DirecTV receiver.
If necessary, use the double sided adhesive tape (included) to secure the IR Blaster to a flat surface.
Read the cable box or DirecTV receiver
e.g. Television stand surface
operating instructions regarding
positioning of the signal sensor.
If you peel off the adhesive tape, the surface
may become damaged.
Once you have confirmed the cable box or
DirecTV receiver is operating correctly, secure
it by attaching the adhesive tape.
Cable box or DirecTV receiver
RQT8365
15
EH55English.book Page 16 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
STEP 1 Connection
Program listings for satellite services other than DirecTV cannot be received. Without this information,
program-based recordings cannot be made. However, recordings can still be set manually.
You can use the DISH Network TV Guide to make scheduled recordings on this unit.
DirecTV/DISH Network service is only available in the United States and is not available or supported in
Canada.
E
Connection with a television and satellite receiver other than DirecTV
Satellite
antenna
≥If your television does not have
AUDIO/VIDEO terminals
(➡ 17, e).
≥If you would like to enjoy higher
picture quality. (➡ 18, 19)
Cable from the
wall or antenna
signal
1
4
2
RF
IN
Red White Yellow
IN1
PB
AV OUT
PR
OPTICAL
IN3
IN3
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
This unit
Y
Red White Yellow
OUT2
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
Television
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Audio/Video cable (included)
OUT1
75 ≠ coaxial
cable
AUDIO IN
R L VIDEO IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
AC IN
Red White Yellow
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
G-LINK
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
AC power supply cord
(included)
Connect only after all
other connections are
complete.
75 ≠ coaxial cable
(included)
3
5
Audio/Video cable
6
Satellite receiver
Red White Yellow OUT
IN
Satellite
R
L
AUDIO
RF
F
To a household AC outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
Cable
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Connection with a television, a video cassette recorder and satellite receiver other than DirecTV
The connection will allow the video cassette recorder to be used for playback and recording when this unit is turned off.
Television
AUDIO IN
R L VIDEO IN
Satellite
Cable from the wall
≥If your television does not have
antenna
or antenna signal
AUDIO/VIDEO terminals
Red White Yellow
(➡ 17, f).
≥If you would like to enjoy higher
Audio/Video cable
picture quality. (➡ 18, 19)
(included)
1
2
4
VHF/UHF
RF IN
3
This unit
RF
IN
Y
Red White Yellow
IN1
OUT1
AV OUT
PR
IN3
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
OPTICAL
IN3
OUT2
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
Red White Yellow
PB
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
AC IN
Red White Yellow
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
G-LINK
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
AC power supply cord
(included)
Connect only after all
other connections are
complete.
Video cassette recorder
Audio/Video
cable
5 6
Audio/Video cable
OUT
VHF/UHF
RF IN
IN
75 ≠ coaxial
cable
VHF/UHF
RF OUT
Yellow
White
Red
OUT
IN
VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
IN
AUDIO
L
AUDIO
L
AUDIO
R
AUDIO
R
To a household AC
outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
7
75 ≠ coaxial cable
Red White Yellow OUT
IN
Satellite
8
Cable
RF
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Satellite receiver
RQT8365
16
75 ≠ coaxial cable (included)
9:28 PM
If your television does not have AUDIO/VIDEO terminals, an RF modulator is necessary
The circled numbers in the illustration refer to connections “A”–“F”. Also connect all other cables as well.
a
Connection with a television (➡ 14, A)
Audio/Video cable (included)
3
This unit
RF
IN
Red White Yellow
OUT
RedAUDIO
White Yellow IN
IN1
PB
R
L
VIDEO S-VIDEO
RF
RF
VHF/UHF
RF IN
PR
IN3
OUT2
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
Television
Y
OUT1
RF OUT
RF modulator
STEP 1 Connection
EH55English.book Page 17 Thursday, April 6, 2006
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
2
R-
75 ≠ coaxial cable (included)
75 ≠ coaxial cable
b
Connection with a television and a video cassette recorder (➡ 14, B)
c
Connection with a television, a video cassette recorder and a cable box or DirecTV receiver (➡ 15, D)
4
Audio/Video cable (included)
RF
IN
Y
OUT
RedAUDIO
White Yellow IN
PB
IN1
OUT1
R
L
VIDEO S-VIDEO
RF
RF
VHF/UHF
RF IN
PR
IN3
OUT2
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
Red White Yellow
Television
RF modulator
This unit
VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
R-
Video cassette recorder
75 ≠ coaxial cable
VHF/UHF
RF IN
OUT
3
VHF/UHF
RF OUT
75 ≠ coaxial cable
d
Connection with a television and a cable box or DirecTV receiver (➡ 15, C)
e
Connection with a television and satellite receiver other than DirecTV (➡ 16, E)
f
Connection with a television, a video cassette recorder and satellite receiver other than DirecTV (➡ 16, F)
Audio/Video cable (included)
4
RF modulator
This unit
RF
IN
Y
PB
OUT
RedAUDIO
White Yellow IN
IN1
OUT1
R
L
VIDEO S-VIDEO
RF
RF
VHF/UHF
RF IN
PR
IN3
OUT2
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
Red White Yellow
Television
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
3
R-
75 ≠ coaxial cable (included)
75 ≠ coaxial cable
OUT
RF
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
Cable box, DirecTV receiver or Satellite receiver
RQT8365
17
EH55English.book Page 18 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
STEP 1 Connection
If the antenna connectors don’t match
Use one of the following connections to suit the antenna lead to the unit’s RF IN terminal, and the 75 ≠ coaxial cable to the antenna terminals on
the equipment (television etc.). Refer to other equipment’s operating instructions.
Type
A twin lead
This unit
300–75 ≠ transformer
from the antenna
(Flat) Twin lead
300 ≠ cable
A twin lead
and a coaxial
plug
Other equipment (television etc.)
To this unit’s RF IN
terminal
75 ≠ coaxial
cable
Television
from the antenna
VHF
VHF/UHF band separator
VHF/UHF band mixer
(Flat) Twin lead 300 ≠ cable
(Round)75 ≠
coaxial cable
Two twin
leads
VHF or
UHF
75–300 ≠ transformer
UHF
Television
75 ≠ coaxial
cable
To this unit’s RF IN
terminal
from the antenna
VHF
VHF/UHF band separator
VHF/UHF band mixer
UHF
(Flat) Twin lead
300 ≠ cable
75 ≠ coaxial
cable
To this unit’s RF
IN terminal
300–75 ≠ transformer
Television
To enjoy even higher picture quality
Connecting to the S VIDEO IN terminal
Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
These terminals can be used for either interlace or progressive output
(➡ 77) and provide a purer picture than the S VIDEO OUT terminal.
Connect to terminals of the same color.
Television
AUDIO IN
R L
AUDIO IN
R L
S VIDEO IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
Television
Red White
Red White
Audio/Video
cable
Component
video cable
Audio/Video
cable
S Video cable
This unit
RF
IN
Red White
RF
IN
Y
Red White
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
R-AUDIO-L
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
V
PR
IN3
VIDEO
OUT2
IN3
OUT2
PR
R-AUDIO-L
IN1
PB
OUT1
IN1
PB
OUT1
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
This unit
Y
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VID
Connecting an amplifier or system component
∫ Connection to a stereo amplifier
∫ Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal
≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an amplifier
with a built-in decoder displaying the logo marks below using an optical
digital audio cable and change the settings in “Digital Audio Output” (➡ 62).
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“HDMI Audio Output” to “Off” in the Setup menu (➡ 63). In this
case audio is only output from the amplifier not the television.
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable, check the
terminal shape of the equipment to be connected.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
≥Even if using this connection method, output will be in only 2
channels when playing DVD-Audio.
Amplifier’s rear panel
AUDIO IN
R L
Red White
OPTICAL IN
Amplifier’s rear panel
Audio cable
Optical digital audio cable
Do not bend sharply when connecting.
To OUT 1 or OUT 2
RF
IN
Red White
OUT1
18
AV OUT
This unit
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
OUT2
RQT8365
Insert fully, with
this side facing
up.
OPTICAL
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
SV
O
G-LINK
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
This unit
9:28 PM
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) terminal
HDMI is the next-generation interface for digital devices. When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video
signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High
Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1125i (1080i) or 750p (720p) HD video.
Set the following:
From the Setup menu (➡ 63), set “HDMI Video Output” and “HDMI Audio Output” to “On”.
≥Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
Connecting to an HDMI compatible television
Connecting to an HDMI compatible television and amplifier/receiver
Television
Television
HDMI IN
HDMI IN
HDMI IN
This unit
HDMI OUT
HDMI AV OUT
IN1
Amplifier’s/
receiver’s rear
panel
AV OUT
OPTICAL
IN3
ONENT
OUT
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
G-LINK
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
≥If connecting to a television incompatible with CPPM (Content
Protection for Prerecorded Media, ➡ 76), copy-protected DVD-Audio
cannot be output through the HDMI terminal. Connect the audio
cables (red and white) to the corresponding audio input terminals.
≥If you are connecting to a television that is only compatible with 2
channel output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down–mixed
(➡ 76) and output as 2 channels. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI
input terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when
connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
STEP 1 Connection
EH55English.book Page 19 Thursday, April 6, 2006
This unit
HDMI AV OUT
AV OUT
OPTICAL
DIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
G-LINK
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
≥If the speaker setup cannot be completed on the amplifier/receiver, then
use the “HDMI Connection Speakers Setting” (➡ 63).
≥If connecting to an amplifier/receiver incompatible with CPPM (Content
Protection for Prerecorded Media, ➡ 76), copy-protected DVD-Audio
cannot be output through the HDMI terminal. Connect to the amplifier/
receiver with an optical digital cable or audio cables (red and white).
Control with HDMI (HDAVI ControlTM)
What is HDAVI Control?
HDAVI Control is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic television (VIERA) or receiver under HDAVI
Control.You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating instructions for connected equipment
for operational details.
After connecting the unit to a television using an HDMI cable, set “Ctrl with HDMI” to “On”. (➡ 63)
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m/4.9 ft.), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m/9.8 ft.), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m/16.4 ft.), etc.
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilized.
≥Set the HDAVI Control operations on the connected equipment (e.g., television).
Turn on all HDAVI Control compatible equipment, turn the television off and on, and then select this unit’s input channel on the connected
television so that the HDAVI Control function works properly. Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.
Automatic input switching
When the following operations are performed the television will
automatically switch the input channel and displays the
corresponding action.
–When play starts on the unit
–When an action that uses the display screen is performed (e.g.,
Direct Navigator screen, scheduled recording screen)
Power on link
When the television is off and the following operations are
performed, the television will automatically turn on and displays the
corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
–When play starts on the unit
–When an action that uses the display screen is performed (e.g.,
Direct Navigator screen, scheduled recording screen)
Power off link
All connected equipment compatible with HDAVI Control including
this unit automatically turns off when you switch the television off.
≥The unit automatically turns off even when the FUNCTIONS screen,
any of the status messages, or any of the on-screen menus is
displayed on the television. The unit automatically turns off while in
playback or when scheduled to record. (In the latter case,
scheduled recordings remain effective after the unit turns off).
≥Only this unit turns off when you press [Í DVD POWER] for
shutting it down. Other connected equipment compatible with
HDAVI Control stay on.
[Note]
≥Even if the television is turned off, the unit will not turn off at the
same time in the following conditions:
–When you pressed [¥ REC] and the unit is still recording
–When copying
–When finalizing
For your reference
≥When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit for “Automatic input
switching” or “Power on link”, the playback image is not
immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to
watch the contents from where playback started.
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.
≥When the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) terminal is used for
audio output and the unit is connected to the television with an HDMI
cable, set “HDMI Audio Output” to “Off” in the setup menu. (➡ 63)
RQT8365
19
EH55English.book Page 20 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
STEP 2 Setting up the TV Guide On ScreenTM system
2
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE
REC
DRIVE
SELECT
k1.3
1.3
Press [3, 4] to select the language
and press [ENTER].
≥If you make a mistake, press [RETURN] to return to an
earlier screen.
POWER Í/ l
Aspect Ratio Selection
DVD
Í DVD POWER
POWER
TV
Í
POWER
Select TV type and press ENTER.
(Please refer to Operation lnstraction
for details.)
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
4:3
4:3 TV
16:9
16:9 Widescreen TV
PAGE
Numbered
buttons
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
ENTER
CH
PAGE W X
VCR Plus
Plusi
3
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
STOP
≥Only English is displayed in the TV Guide On ScreenTM
system. Other languages cannot be displayed.
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide
SCHEDULE
TV GUIDE
TV GUIDE
ENTER
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
Press [3, 4] to select “4:3 TV” or “16:9
Widescreen TV” and press [ENTER].
TV Guide setup begins.
3,4,2,1
ENTER
TV made easy.
START
Just press ENTER on your remote to begin!
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
AUDIO
A
REC
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER
Info
B
RETURN
Press [ENTER].
Info
Following the on-screen messages, input the operating
environment for your television.
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
After plugging the unit into your household AC outlet and pressing
[Í DVD POWER] to turn the unit on for the first time, the unit starts
language, TV aspect type and TV Guide On ScreenTM system setup.
Basic operations of the remote control
TV Guide On ScreenTM system
This unit features the TV Guide On ScreenTM system that provides
an 8-day grid of TV programs available in your area. Use the TV
Guide On ScreenTM system to choose TV programs and simplify the
recording of your favorite TV shows (➡ 28, 31–35). Best of all this
service is free!
≥The first few days of listings usually appear within 24 hours after a
successful Setup. It may take up to six days for the full eight days
of program listings to appear.
≥In order to cool the circuits used when downloading the program
listings, the cooling fan may sometimes operate when the unit is
turned off. This is not a malfunction.
To highlight selection
➔
[3, 4, 2, 1]
To confirm
➔
Press [ENTER]
To view help information
➔
Press [Info]
To enter numbers
➔
Press the numbered buttons
≥Select “Next” and press [ENTER] to go to the next screen.
≥Select “Back” and press [ENTER] to return to the previous
screen.
4
Set the country (USA/Canada)
Which country is your DVD Recorder located in?
USA
IMPORTANT
≥The TV Guide On ScreenTM system must be set up whether
it is then used or not. You cannot use the scheduled
recording feature unless this setup is completed.
Canada
5
≥TV Guide On Screen system is supported by selected
DISH network and DirecTV receivers, using 480i mode.
Set the ZIP (Postal) code
TM
Please enter the 5-digit ZIP Code where your DVD Recorder is located:
≥DirecTV/DISH Network service is only available in the
United States and is not available or supported in Canada.
≥If you are using a satellite service other than DirecTV, you
cannot receive the program listings on this unit. Without
this information, program-based recordings cannot be
made. However, recordings can still be set manually.
Preparation
Turn on the television and select the
appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
≥When using the cable box or DirecTV receiver, check the following.
–Make sure the IR Blaster is connected and positioned properly (➡ 15).
–Make sure the cable box or DirecTV receiver is turned on.
1
=
=
=
Set the service(s) being used.
≥You can select up to 2 services.
Press [3, 4] to select the service being used and press
[ENTER]. If you want to select 2 services, press [3, 4] to
select one more service and press [ENTER].
≥If you selected “Cable with a Cable Box” or “DirecTV”, then
also select “Antenna”.
≥If the service you use is not listed on the screen below, then
select “Antenna”, and continue. Then, after exiting the “Set
Clock and Channels Automatically” screen in step 8, press
[ENTER], continue and press [RETURN]. After this step,
perform “Set Clock Manually”. (➡ 60)
Please select which service(s) you would like your TV Guide On Screen™ to
support (check all that apply):
English
Español
Français
20
6
=
Press [Í DVD POWER].
Select Language
Seleccione el idioma
Sélection de Langue
RQT8365
=
Press ENTER
Pulse ENTER
Appuyer sur ENTER
Antenna
Cable without a Cable Box
Cable with a Cable Box
DirecTV
DISH Network
To learn more about the setup contents of various services,
see the list on the next page.
9:28 PM
Please perform setup by following all instructions that apply to your current service.
DirecTV/DISH Network service is only available in the United States and is not available or
supported in Canada.
Service
Set the following
Antenna
≥You cannot select both “Antenna” and “Cable without a Cable Box”.
≥Further setup is not necessary.
Cable without
a Cable Box
Cable with a
Cable Box
1 Cable box connection channel (“RF, Channel 2”/ “RF, Channel 3”/ “RF, Channel 4”/ “IN3”)
–“IN3” is the usual selection.
(If you are connecting the cable box to this unit’s RF terminal, select “RF, Channel 2”, “RF, Channel 3” or “RF,
Channel 4”, according to the cable box setting.)
2 Are you using a digital service package?
Select “Yes”, “No” or “I don’t know”.
3 Check how the channels are input.
Select how your current cable box inputs 2, 3, and 4-digit numbered channels.
4 Cable box brand
–Move down with [4] for more brands.
–You can also press [PAGE W] or [PAGE X] to skip several lines.
5 IR signal code
–Make sure your cable box is set to the channel that appears on screen and press [ENTER].
STEP 2 Setting up the TV Guide On ScreenTM system
EH55English.book Page 21 Thursday, April 6, 2006
The unit begins trying various IR codes to see which one communicates properly with your cable box. It’s quite
common for this phase of the setup to be repeated numerous times.
Is your cable box now tuned to channel 09?
Yes
No
Test this code again
–If the cable box has changed to channel 09, select “Yes”.
–If the cable box is still set to the same channel, select “No”. Repeat this step until the cable box changes to
channel 09.
–If you want to try the code again for some reason, e.g., you accidentally moved the IR Blaster, select “Test
this code again”.
1 Satellite receiver connection channel (“RF, Channel 2”/ “RF, Channel 3”/ “RF, Channel 4”/ “IN3”)
–“IN3” is the usual selection.
(If you are connecting the satellite receiver to this unit’s RF terminal, select “RF, Channel 2”, “RF, Channel 3” or
“RF, Channel 4”, according to the satellite receiver setting.)
2 Check how the channels are input.
Select how your current DirecTV receiver inputs 2, 3, and 4-digit numbered channels.
3 Satellite receiver brand
–Move down with [4] for more brands.
–You can also press [PAGE W] or [PAGE X] to skip several lines.
4 IR signal code
–Turn your satellite receiver ON and press [ENTER].
If you are watching DirecTV in 4:3 aspect with the side panel, set the side panel to “Off” on the
DirecTV receiver in order to correctly receive the program listings.
DirecTV
The unit begins trying various IR codes to see which one communicates properly with your satellite receiver.
It’s quite common for this phase of the setup to be repeated numerous times.
Did your satellite receiver change channels ?
Yes
No
Test this code again
Look at the display of the DirecTV receiver.
–If the channel display has changed, then select “Yes”.
–If the satellite receiver is still set to the same channel, select “No”. Repeat this step until the satellite receiver
changes the channel.
–If you want to try the code again for some reason, e.g., you accidentally moved the IR Blaster, select “Test
this code again”.
DISH Network
≥Satellite receiver connection channel (“RF, Channel 2”/ “RF, Channel 3”/ “RF, Channel 4”/ “IN3”)
–“IN3” is the usual selection.
(If you are connecting the satellite receiver to this unit’s RF terminal, select “RF, Channel 2”, “RF, Channel 3” or
“RF, Channel 4”, according to the satellite receiver setting.)
You cannot use the IR Blaster included with this unit.
You cannot set other equipment.
Once setup is finished ➡ 22, Step 7, Confirm the settings.
Continued on next page
RQT8365
21
EH55English.book Page 22 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
STEP 3 Downloading
STEP 2 Setting up the TV Guide On ScreenTM system
Refer to the control reference on page 20.
7
Confirm the settings.
e.g.,
If you are using a satellite service other than DirecTV,
you cannot receive the program listings on this unit.
1
ZIP Code - 11111 (USA)
Cable on "RF"
“BYE” appears briefly. This shows the unit is in standby mode.
The unit is now ready to download the program listings.
Are the above settings correct?
No damage will occur if the unit is used sooner, but the
channel line-up and program listings may not have been fully
downloaded.
Yes, continue setup process.
No, repeat setup process
Check the following again, so the downloading will not fail.
If you connect a cable box or a DirecTV receiver,
≥the output terminal of the cable box or DirecTV receiver is
connected to this unit’s IN3 terminal (➡ 15) or RF IN terminal
≥the IR Blaster is correctly connected and installed (➡ 15)
≥the cable box or DirecTV receiver is turned on
–If the information is correct, select “Yes, continue setup process”.
–If the information is not correct, select “No, repeat setup
process” to start the setting again.
8
Press [ENTER].
Depending on the equipment that you connected, one of
the following screens appears.
“Set Clock and Channels Automatically” screen
Set Clock and Channels Automatically
Connect antenna or Cable TV to RF IN.
If you use a cable box, then tune it to
your local PBS channel, When done,
please press ENTER.
ENTER
Press [ENTER].
The unit starts setting channels automatically. This takes a
few minutes. The unit then proceeds with setting the clock
automatically. The time is displayed when finished.
A television reception screen or a blue background screen is
displayed.
If there is an error while setting the channels and/or clock
automatically, the “Set Clock Manually” screen (➡ below) is
automatically displayed.
“Set Clock Manually” screen
Set Clock Manually
Month
1
Day
/
1
/
Press [Í DVD POWER]. (The unit
turns off, then wait 24 hours.)
Year
Hour
2000 SAT
12 : 00 AM
Minute
DST
Time Zone
Off
EST
ENTER
2
Press [TV GUIDE].
≥If you find “TV Guide On Screen Setup Progress” displayed on the
television, the unit has not yet downloaded the TV Guide On
ScreenTM data.
≥If you press [TV GUIDE] without completing setup, the start setup
screen will appear. If you want to complete TV Guide setup select
“Start setup”.
≥This unit may download more than one channel line-up. Follow the
on-screen instructions and select one of these.
SEARCH
SETUP
SCHEDULE
SCHEDULE
INFO
87 NWGB
TODAY
8:00PM
SEARCH
8:30
INFO
8:30PM
Channel
STATUS
search for time
search for TV stations
with TV Guide data
search for channel lineup
listings transmission
8:00
Last
TV Guide On Screen Setup Progress
Note: It may take up to 24 hours to start receiving listings.
STEP
LISTINGS
In Progress
In Progress
In Progress
In Progress
pTV
TV
NWBG
ducation
BOX
ANiMe
Network
PBS
For updating data
Leave the unit in standby mode when you are not using it. The unit
will download the necessary data to maintain the program listings
while it is in standby mode.
[Note]
Some Setup menus no longer need to be set after this unit
downloads the program listings. These menus turn grey and become
un-selectable. (➡ 60)
If you press [TV GUIDE] and the following screen appears, then
the unit has not been able to obtain data for 3 days or more.
1 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change
and press [3, 4] to change the setting.
≥DST (Daylight Saving Time): On or Off
If you select “On”, the clock is advanced one hour
starting at 2 a.m. on the first Sunday in April and ending
at 2 a.m. on the last Sunday in October.
≥Time Zone shows the time difference from Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT).
EST (Eastern Standard Time) l GMT j5
CST (Central Standard Time) l GMT j6
MST (Mountain Standard Time)l GMT j7
PST (Pacific Standard Time) l GMT j8
AST (Alaska Standard Time) l GMT j9
HST (Hawaii Standard Time) l GMT j10
2 Press [ENTER].
A television reception screen or a blue background screen
is displayed. The clock starts.
Regarding DST (Daylight Saving Time)
Legal revision is expected to change the DST period in 2007.
When you use the unit with DST on, the change may cause the
unit’s clock to go behind the actual time. Check the DST setting
in “Set Clock Manually” in the “Setup menu” (➡ 60), set DST
off and reset the clock correctly if you are using this function.
If the TV Guide On ScreenTM data is correctly received, then
you do not need to make any changes to the DST settings.
RQT8365
22
When you want to change the TV Guide settings after moving,
etc., please perform setup steps 1 and 2 on page 64. (The
program listings will be erased.) After completing steps 1 and 2,
please perform TV Guide setup again from the beginning.
?????????????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????
???????????????????
????????????????
??????????????????
Exit Guide
Stop Search
Timer Recording
Change System Settings
Exit Guide:
Return to the television reception screen.
Stop Search:
Stop downloading the data. (However the unit
will automatically stop downloading the data 5
days after it first started.)
Search Again:
Restart the data download when it has
stopped.
Timer Recording:
Set for scheduled recording manually (➡ 29).
Change System
Settings:
Set the TV Guide settings again.
≥In step 6 (➡ 20), if you selected “Antenna” or
“Cable without a Cable Box” in addition to
another service, then you may need to
select either “Antenna” or “Cable without a
Cable Box” by itself. You will now be able to
watch broadcasts with this unit.
If further assistance is needed,
In the U.S.A.: Contact Panasonic’s Customer Call Center at
1-800-211-PANA (7262).
In Canada: Call 1-800-561-5505.
EH55English.book Page 23 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
DVD
Television operation
POWER
TV
Í
POWER
Í
You can operate the TV through the unit’s remote control.
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
TV operation
buttons
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numbered
buttons
SKIP
CH
e.g., 0250: [0] ➡ [2] ➡ [5] ➡ [0]
Manufacturer and Code No.
VCR Plus
Plusi
Panasonic
National
QUASAR
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
SCHEDULE
SUB MENU
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
TV GUIDE
ENTER
FUNCTIONS
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
S
AUDIO
DISPLAY
A
B
CREATE
CHAPTER
RETURN
I f
Info
Selecting television
type
REC REC MODE STATUS
CM SKIP
This setting allows you to select the type of television connected.
1
2
3
4
5
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “TV Screen”
and press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “TV Type” and
press [ENTER].
Aspect 4:3 & 480i
Aspect 16:9 & 480p
SANYO
0154
0165/0093
GOLDSTAR
0178/
0457/0317
SONY
0000
HITACHI
0145
SYLVANIA
0054
JVC
0053
THOMSON
0047
LG
0178/
0457/0317
TOSHIBA
0156
MAGNAVOX
0054
ZENITH
0017
MITSUBISHI
0150
Test by turning on the television and changing channels.
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows correct
operation.
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for your
television does not allow control of your television, this remote
control is not compatible with your television.
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
When other Panasonic products
respond to this remote control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together.
Use “1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Remote
Control Code” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select the code (1, 2,
or 3) and press [ENTER].
Setup
ENTER
4:3 standard aspect television 16:9 widescreen television
6
Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [ENTER].
When connected to a 4:3 standard aspect television
To change how a DVD-Video or DVD-RAM widescreen picture
is shown on a 4:3 standard aspect television
➡ 63, “4:3 TV Settings for DVD-Video” or “4:3 TV Settings for
DVD-RAM”
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Channel
Setup
Disc
16:9
≥480p/480i:
–Select “480p” if the television is compatible with
progressive output.
–Select “480i” if the television is not compatible with
progressive output or you are unsure about television
compatibility.
0060/0587/
0702
SHARP
≥Aspect 4:3/Aspect 16:9:
4:3
SAMSUNG
0154
6
Aspect 16:9 & 480i
0047
0047
Aspect 4:3 & 480p
16:9 Aspect (Widescreen TV)
0054
RCA
GE
5
4:3 TV
0250/0051
PHILIPS (RC-5)
FISHER
TV Type
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
Point the remote control at the television
While pressing [Í POWER TV] enter the
code with the numbered buttons.
Remote Control Code
STEP 2 Setting up the TV Guide On ScreenTM system/STEP 3 Downloading/STEP 4 Set up to match your television and the unit’s remote control
STEP 4 Set up to match your television and the unit’s remote control
Press “±” and “ENTER” together
for more than 2 seconds on the remote.
7
To change the code on the remote control
8
While pressing [ENTER], press and
hold the numbered button ([1], [2] or
[3]) for more than 2 seconds.
Press [ENTER].
∫ When the following indicator appears on the unit’s
display and you are unable to operate the unit
The unit’s remote control code
Press and hold [ENTER] and the indicated number button at the
same time for more than 2 seconds.
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8365
23
EH55English.book Page 24 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Recording television programs
HDD, DVD indicator
2
3
POWER
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
OPEN/CLOSE
k1.3
1.3
S VIDEO VIDEO L/MONO-AUDIO-R
IN2
1
Numbered
Numbered
buttons
buttons
POWER
TV
Í
POWER
3
REC
To select with the numbered buttons:
Antenna Channel
CableTV, Satellite Channel
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5]
e.g., 5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Select the audio to record (➡ 27).
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
1∫ 5
2
DVD
≥How to insert a disc (➡ 13).
REC
DRIVE
SELECT
CH
DV IN
If you selected the DVD drive
CH
3
VCR Plus
Plusi
4
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP, or EP).
;
∫
REC
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
SCHEDULE
Remaining time on
the disc (EP mode:
approximately 355
Hour
hours)
≥When there is over 100 hours available, the remaining
recording time is displayed in hourly units.
ENTER
SUB MENU
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
TV GUIDE
RETURN
3,4,2,1
ENTER
≥When XP mode is selected, you can also record sound
using LPCM (➡ 62).
S
AUDIO
A
5
4
REC
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER
Info
B
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
[Note]
≥It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD
drive simultaneously.
≥[+RW] You can create a Top Menu using “Create DVD Top Menu”
(➡ 58).
Recording or editing on the disc may delete the menu. In that case,
create the menu again.
Recording television programs
[HDD]
≥You can record up to 500 titles on HDD. (When continuously
recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8
hours.)
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]
≥You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
[+R] [+RW]
≥You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
[-R]DL] [+R]DL]
≥You cannot directly record to DVD-R DL, and +R DL discs with this
unit. You must first record to the HDD, and then copy from the HDD
to disc.
[SD]
≥It is not possible to record onto a card.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
1
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD recording drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit.
RQT8365
24
Remaining time on
the disc (XP mode: 36
hours 41 minutes)
5
Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
REC
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on
disc. Data will not be overwritten.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording. You can change the channel or recording mode
while paused; however, the recording will then be as a
separate title.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for scheduled recording,
but once the time for the scheduled recording to begin is reached,
any recording taking place will stop and the scheduled recording
will begin.
∫ To pause recording
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to
complete recording management information after recording
finishes.
≥If the program is listed in the program listings (➡ 32), its name is
automatically made the title name after recording. (The recorded
title must be more than 3 minutes.)
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to
finalize them (➡ 58).
9:28 PM
Recording modes and approximate recording times
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
Recording Mode
HDD
(200 GB)
Single-sided
(4.7 GB)
DVD-RAM
Double-sided§1
(9.4 GB)
DVD-R
DVD-RW, +R
+RW (4.7 GB)
DVD-R DL §3
(8.5 GB)
+R DL §3
(8.5 GB)
XP (High picture
quality recording
mode)
44 h
1h
2h
1h
1 h 45 min
1 h 45 min
SP (Standard
recording mode)
89 h
2h
4h
2h
3 h 35 min
3 h 35 min
LP (Long recording
mode)
177 h
4h
8h
4h
7 h 10 min
7 h 10 min
EP (Extra long
recording mode)§4
355 h
(266 h§2)
8 h (6 h§2)
16 h (12 h§2)
8 h (6 h§2)
14 h 20 min
(10 h 45 min§2)
Cannot copy
355 h
maximum
8 h maximum
8 h maximum for one
side
8 h maximum
14 h 20 min
Approximately 9 h
with video quality
equivalent to LP
mode.
FR (Flexible
Recording mode)§4
§1
§2
§3
§4
Recording television programs
EH55English.book Page 25 Thursday, April 6, 2006
It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
When “Recording Time in EP Mode” is set to “EP (6H)” in the Setup menu (➡ 61).
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6H)” than when using “EP (8H)”.
You cannot directly record to these discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
When recording to the HDD in FR mode (recordings 5 hours or longer) or EP mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
discs.
≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8H) mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. Use EP
(6H) mode if playback may be on other equipment.
FR (Flexible Recording)
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP
(8H) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space
with the best possible recording quality.
≥You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when using Flexible
recording (➡ 26), programming scheduled recordings (➡ 29,
Manually programming scheduled recordings) or copying (➡ 51,
step 5).
∫ Using “Flexible Recording” is convenient in
these kinds of situations.
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
≥When you want to record a long program with the best picture
quality possible
[HDD]
≥When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly.
You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space.
e.g., Recording a 90 minutes program to disc
If you select XP mode, the program will not fit one disc.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
A second disc is necessary for
30 minutes of the program.
When the format confirmation screen is displayed
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents will be deleted.
Format
This disc is not formatted properly.
Do you want to format the
disc in DVD Management?
Yes
No
ENTER
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥Several steps are necessary to format a disc. Refer to “Deleting all
the contents of a disc or card—Format” (➡ 57)
When removing a recorded disc
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
When you press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit while stopped:
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
Make compatible for playback on other DVD players ( Finalize )
Finalizing is necessary to enable playback
of the disc on compatible DVD players.
Once finalized, titles cannot be added to the disc.
It will take approximately ± minutes. Start ?
Press ”REC” to start finalizing.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to postpone
finalizing. The disc can be played only on
this unit. You can Finalize it later.
If you select SP mode, the program will fit one disc.
∫ To finalize the disc
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
However there will be 30 minutes remaining
disc space.
If you select “Flexible Recording” the program will fit one disc
perfectly.
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, view the menu select screen or
provide a disc name, select “Top Menu Style”, “Playback will start
with:” (➡ 58) or “Disc Name” (➡ 56) in “DVD Management” before
finalizing.
∫ To open the tray without disc finalization
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
RQT8365
25
EH55English.book Page 26 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Recording television programs
Flexible Recording
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
DVD
DRIVE SELECT
POWER
TV
Í
POWER
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR
mode.
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
PAGE
Numbered
buttons
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
∫
VCR Plus
Plusi
DELETE
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY/x1.3
2
FUNCTIONS
3
ENTER
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
TV GUIDE
RETURN
S
AUDIO
¥ REC
1
SCHEDULE
SUB MENU
AUDIO
1
SLOW/SEARCH
TIME SLIP
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
Preparation
≥Select the channel or the external input (IN1, IN2, IN3 or DV) to
record.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD recording drive.
CH
A
REC
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
Record in FR mode.
Max recording time
Set recording time
Info
B
Start
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
The unit switches to standby after about 6 hours in the stop mode.
You can turn this feature off or change the time to 2 hours (➡ 60, “Off
Timer”).
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording & EPG Display
(When connecting to a TV using the Video or S-Video terminal)
From the power on state, recording starts about 1 second§ after the
[¥ REC] is pressed. If [TV GUIDE] is pressed while the unit is off,
the Electronic Program Guide (EPG) starts being displayed in less
than 1 second, with the full EPG being displayed in about 1.5
seconds.
§Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
During recording
Press [¥ REC] to select the recording time.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00
,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
≥This does not work during scheduled recordings (➡ 28) or while
using Flexible Recording (➡ right).
≥If you change the channel or recording mode while recording is
paused, the time specified to stop recording is canceled.
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] several times until the counter appears.
≥The time to stop recording is canceled; however, recording
continues.
26
8 Hour 00 Min.
8 Hour 00 Min.
Cancel
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum
recording time in FR mode.
STATUS
Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
recording time.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
≥You cannot record for more than 8 hours.
Off Timer
RQT8365
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible
Recording” and press [ENTER].
Flexible Recording
4
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
While stopped
5
When you want to start recording
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”
and press [ENTER].
≥Recording starts.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in
the display.
XP
SP
LP
EP
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS].
e.g., HDD
HDD Hard-Drive
Rec. 0:59
CH 71
Stereo
Remaining
time
9:28 PM
Playing while you are recording
[HDD] [RAM]
Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording—Chasing playback
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.
≥There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.
To stop play
Press [∫].
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops
Press [∫].
To stop scheduled recording
1 Press [∫] to stop playing.
2 2 seconds after play stops
Press [∫], then press [2, 1] to select “Stop recording” and press
[ENTER].
(Scheduled recording ➡ 28)
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—
Simultaneous rec and play
≥You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press
[DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD recording drive.
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title
and press [ENTER].
≥There is no sound output while searching forward or
backward.
Selecting audio to record
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [AUDIO].
[.
l
l
l
l
l
a-
Stereo: Main audio (stereo)
≥If the broadcast is “MonoiSAP”, audio will be
v
monaural even if you select Stereo mode.
SAP
Secondary audio program (SAP)
Audio: ≥If recorded in SAP mode, main audio is also
recorded.
v
Mono:
HDD Hard-Drive
CH 12
Main audio (monaural)
≥Select “Mono” if reception is poor during a stereo
broadcast.
Recording television programs
EH55English.book Page 27 Thursday, April 6, 2006
e.g., “Stereo” is selected
“((” appears when the unit is receiving the audio
type you selected.
(( Stereo
≥If you change the sound setting while recording, the recorded
sound will also change.
[Note]
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases while the
unit is stopped, regardless of which drive is selected.
≥While a disc other than DVD-RAM is inserted.
≥When “Enable High-Speed Mode” is set to “On” (➡ 61). (The
default setting is “On”.)
≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio for XP Recording” is
set to “LPCM” (➡ 62).
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
[HDD] [RAM] (When recording sound in LPCM)
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Enable High-Speed Mode” is set to “On”)
Select the audio (Main or SAP) in “Multichannel TV Sound ( MTS )” in the Setup
menu (➡ 62).
To stop play
Press [∫].
To exit the Direct Navigator screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To stop recording
After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
2 If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD recording
drive.
3 Press [∫].
To stop scheduled recording
1 Press [∫] to stop playing.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
3 If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD recording
drive.
4 Press [∫], then press [2, 1] to select “Stop recording” and press
[ENTER].
(Scheduled recording ➡ 28)
RQT8365
27
EH55English.book Page 28 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Scheduled recording
DVD
Í DVD POWER
Using the TV Guide On ScreenTM
system to make scheduled recordings
POWER
TV
Í
POWER
You can perform scheduled recording easily by just marking the
desired program(s) in the program listings.
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
DRIVE SELECT
For successful scheduled recordings
The program listings will not display immediately after
purchasing this unit. Complete the TV Guide On ScreenTM
system setup and download the program listings (➡ 20).
PAGE
Numbered
buttons
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
∫
CH
VCR Plus
Plusi
PAUSE
STOP
SCHEDULE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER
¥ REC
REC
SCHEDULE
TV GUIDE
Further instructions on utilizing the TV Guide On ScreenTM
system ➡ 31
SCHEDULE
87 NWGB
3,4,2,1
ENTER
TODAY
Info
B
Press [TV GUIDE].
If the program listings are not completely downloaded, the
“Display setup progress” screen is displayed.
Select “LISTINGS” using [2, 1]. (You can use only the
portion of TV programs that downloaded).
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
A
1
PLAY/x1.3
TV GUIDE
AUDIO
VCR Plusr
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
TIME SLIP
SUB MENU
CH, PAGE
WX
LISTINGS
SEARCH
8:00
8:00PM
8:30
INFO
8:30PM
Last
Info
Channel
pTV
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
TV
NWBG
ducation
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
program.
≥To skip one screen
Press [PAGE W] or [PAGE X].
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
3
“
” appears in the list to indicate that the program is set for
scheduled recording.
≥Press [¥ REC] to change the frequency.
Each time you press the button:
[.
Records only once.
l
;
l
l
R Records regularly.
l
;
l
R
R Records weekly.
l
;
l
{
Off
Program listings for satellite services other than DirecTV
cannot be received.
≥Customers using the DISH Network service can set
scheduled recordings on the DISH Network receiver
(➡ below).
≥If you are using another satellite service, you can use
manual recording to record.
DirecTV/DISH Network service is only available in the United
states and is not available or supported in Canada.
≥As long as the setting is not changed, the program is
recorded to the HDD in the recording mode selected by the
unit.
≥To change the setting
Press [SUB MENU] and press [3, 4] to select “edit
recording” and press [ENTER]. (➡ 32, To make scheduled
recording, step 2).
Using the DISH Network service
Program scheduled recordings using the DISH Network receiver.
At this time, set the unit to the channel that receives broadcasts
from the DISH Network receiver.
1 Press [W X CH] to select the appropriate channel on this unit.
2 Press [Í DVD POWER] to turn this unit off.
≥Visit Gemstar’s homepage for more information about
scheduled recordings for DISH Network.
URL: http://www.tvgos.com/support/echostar/
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Press [¥ REC].
Repeat steps 2–3 to program other recordings.
4
Press [TV GUIDE].
Returns to the television screen.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(➡ 13).
RQT8365
28
If you are performing a scheduled recording with the TV Guide
On ScreenTM system
≥You can enter up to 8 days in advance.
≥The program name becomes the name of the recorded title if the
program is listed on the program listings.
≥There may be some channels that are not displayed in the program
listings even if they are receivable. In this case set them manually
(➡ 29).
When programming is finished and [TV GUIDE] is pressed
≥The unit goes to scheduled recording standby (“F” lights on the
unit’s display); however, it may not turn off automatically. To save
power, turn the unit off by pressing [Í DVD POWER].
≥Scheduled recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit
is turned on/off.
≥When using the cable box or the satellite receiver, make sure the
cable box or the satellite receiver is turned on.
9:28 PM
Manually programming scheduled
recordings
You can manually set the date, channel, start and end times and so
on for programs you want to record.
1
Press [SCHEDULE].
SETUP
SCHEDULE
LISTINGS
Using VCR Plusi system to make
scheduled recordings
Entering PlusCode® numbers is an easy way of making a scheduled
recording. You can find them in TV listings in newspapers and
magazines.
≥VCR Plusi system works only if you connect antenna or “cableready”.
1
Press [VCR Plusr].
VCR Plus+
TO DO
HISTORY
Channel 24
Channel 11
Channel 11
Channel 11
Tue 10/21 12:55 pm
Sat 10/25 2:00 pm
Sat 10/25 3:00 pm
Sat 10/25 3:30 pm
Scheduled recording
EH55English.book Page 29 Thursday, April 6, 2006
DVD 1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP
Remain
10/13 Mon 9:28 PM
W
W
Enter the PlusCode number with the numbered buttons.
2
2
Press [SUB MENU].
Schedule Options menu is displayed.
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select “new manual
recording” and press [ENTER].
Enter the settings.
Press the numbered buttons to enter
the PlusCode number.
≥You can also use the [3, 4, 2, 1] buttons.
≥To correct the number
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.
3
Press [ENTER].
SCHEDULED
RECORDING
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [2, 1] or the
numbered buttons to change the setting.
Channel
24
5
date:
Month/Day/Year
start:
end:
≥You can set up to 8 hours.
≥Press [2, 1] to select “am” or “pm”.
channel:
e.g., 5ch: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
input:
RF/IN1/IN2/IN3
recorder:
HDD/DVD/use default
≥When the recording drive is “DVD” and
there is not enough remaining space,
recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (➡ 30, Relief Recording).
quality:
XP/SP/LP/EP/FR
frequency:
once/weekly/daily/off
SETUP
SCHEDULE
1:55
10/13 Mon 2:28 PM
Date
On
Off
Drive Mode
10/16 Thu 5:55 PM 6:55 PM HDD
SP
≥When “XP” is displayed on the unit’s display, the recording
mode automatically changes to “FR” in order to prevent loss
of recording when there is not enough space.
You can change to “XP” in the SCHEDULE screen (➡ 30).
≥You can only change the channel settings here. Select using
[3, 4].
Change other settings (➡ 30).
4
INFO
TO DO
HISTORY
Channel 24
Channel 11
Channel 11
Channel 11
Channel 11
Tue 10/21 12:55 pm
Sat 10/25 2:00 pm
Sat 10/25 3:00 pm
Sat 10/25 3:30 pm
Sat 10/25 4:00 pm
Press [ENTER].
SETUP
LISTINGS
12:55
DVD 1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP
Title Name
Press [3] to select “schedule
recording” and press [ENTER].
24
Remain
SCHEDULE
LISTINGS
TO DO
HISTORY
Channel 24
Channel 11
Channel 11
Channel 11
Channel 11
Thu 10/16 5:55 pm
Sat 10/25 2:00 pm
Sat 10/25 3:00 pm
Sat 10/25 3:30 pm
Sat 10/25 4:00 pm
W
W
Repeat steps 1–4 to program other recordings.
W
W
5
Press [TV GUIDE].
Returns to the television screen.
Press [3, 4] to select “TO DO” and repeat steps 2–5 to
program other recordings.
6
Press [TV GUIDE].
Returns to the television screen.
∫ Notes on scheduled recording ➡ 30
∫ To check, change or delete a program ➡ 30
∫ To cancel scheduled recording when it has
already begun
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
2 Press [∫], then press [2, 1] to select “Stop recording” and
press [ENTER].
RQT8365
29
EH55English.book Page 30 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Scheduled recording
Refer to the control reference on page 28.
Notes on scheduled recording
Check, change or delete a program
1
≥“F” flashes when the unit cannot go to scheduled recording
standby.
≥Scheduled recordings begin when the set time is reached even
when recording or when playing.
≥Scheduled recordings do not begin while copying in normal
speed mode (➡ 49).
≥If the unit is turned on when scheduled recording begins, it
remains turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off
automatically. You can turn the unit off during scheduled
recording.
≥If you are making consecutive recordings that will start one after
the other, the very end of the title cannot be recorded.
Press [SCHEDULE].
SETUP
SCHEDULE
LISTINGS
TO DO
HISTORY
Golf
Dodzilla
Bull house
Channel 11
Channel 11
Thu 10/16
Thu 10/16
Thu 10/16
Sat 10/25
Sat 10/25
1:00 pm
2:00 pm
3:00 pm
3:30 pm
4:00 pm
W
W
e.g., Program1 10:00–11:00
Program2 11:00–12:00
2
11:00
Press [3, 4] to select the program.
1:00
87
Recording Quality
(Recording mode)
Program
information
1:55
INFO
Recorded
TO DO
Thu 10/16 1:00 pm R
Frequency
(➡ 28, step 3)
Channel or program name (only set for scheduled
recording using TV Guide On ScreenTM system)
Press [SUB MENU].
Schedule Options menu is displayed.
SETUP
87
Schedule Options
go to Service Bar
tune to channel
delete recording
edit recording
set reminder
cancel
SCHEDULE
LISTINGS
3:00
TO DO
Golf
Dodzilla
Bull house
Channel 11
Channel 11
3:30
INFO
Recorded
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Not recorded
Not recorded (approximately 15 seconds)
HISTORY
Golf
3
Program1 Program2
≥If you set DST (Daylight Saving Time) to On when manually
setting the clock (➡ 22), scheduled recording may not work
when summer switches to winter and vice versa.
∫ When there is a duplicate or overlapping
scheduled recording
The scheduled recording that was set last is recorded. None of
the program that was set earlier is recorded even if there is only
partial overlapping.
Scheduled recordings that are not recorded are highlighted in
grey in the SCHEDULE screen.
Time
HISTORY
Thu 10/16
Thu 10/16
Thu 10/16
Sat 10/25
Sat 10/25
1:00 pm
2:00 pm
3:00 pm
3:30 pm
4:00 pm
Not recorded
W
W
Programs set earlier
Not recorded
Program set last
Recorded
∫To change the recording settings
1 Press [3, 4] to select “edit recording” and press
[ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [2, 1] or the
numbered buttons to change the setting as necessary.
3 Press [3] to select “schedule recording” and press
[ENTER].
∫To delete the program
1 Press [3, 4] to select “delete recording” and press
[ENTER].
Confirmation screen is displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “yes” and press [ENTER].
4
Press [TV GUIDE].
Returns to the television screen.
≥The unit is not off. To save power, turn the unit off by
pressing [Í DVD POWER].
RQT8365
30
∫ Relief Recording
When the recording drive is set to “DVD” for scheduled
recording and if the program will not fit onto the disc, the
recording drive will be changed to the “HDD” automatically.
If there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or
when scheduled recording starts while copying, the recording
drive will be changed to the HDD.
≥The Direct Navigator shows which programs were reliefrecorded (“
” is displayed.)(➡ 36).
≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the
program as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.
EH55English.book Page 31 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Refer to the control reference on page 28.
∫ Screen Components
(The screen displayed when [TV GUIDE] is pressed)
Menu
VIdeo window
(The program highlighted is displayed.)
8:08
SCHEDULE
Listings
Options menu Panel Ads
This appears
(Panel menu)
when you press
[SUB MENU].
LISTINGS
8:00
TODAY
Listings Options
8:00PM
SEARCH
8:30
INFO
Remind icon
Record icon
pTV
video unlocked
Information
window
8:30PM
NTV
Channel
go to Service Bar
Service Bar
TV
channel ID logo
edit channels
NWBG
ducation
done
cancel
Icons
BOX
Stereo
ANiMe
Closed
Network
caption
R Program Rating
Scheduled recording/Utilizing the TV Guide On ScreenTM system
Utilizing the TV Guide On ScreenTM system
Programs are categorized
by color
PBS
Green: Sports
Blue: Children’s
Purple: Movies
Teal: Other categories
1
2
Press [TV GUIDE].
Listings Options
go to Service Bar
Press [SUB MENU] and
press [3, 4] to select “go
to Service Bar” and then
press [ENTER].
video unlocked
channel ID logo
edit channels
done
cancel
LISTINGS
SEARCH
INFO
3
Press [2, 1] to select a menu on the
TODAY
Service Bar.
∫ To use menus
Press [4].
The Service bar consists of 4 menus.
LISTINGS:
You can set scheduled recording and
(➡ 32)
scheduled reminder.
SEARCH:
(➡ 33)
You can search TV programs by genre,
keyword, etc.
SETUP:
(➡ 34)
You can change the settings of the TV
Guide On ScreenTM system.
SCHEDULE:
(➡ 35)
You can check, change, or delete a
program set for scheduled recording or
scheduled reminder manually.
Remote control buttons used in these menus
[3, 4, 2, 1]
Select/Enter
[ENTER]
[PAGE W][PAGE X]
Skip one screen
[SUB MENU]
To show Panel menu
[Info]
Change the size of information window
Displays help information for operation
Panel menu items common to these menus
(appear when [SUB MENU] is pressed)
go to Service
Return to the Service bar
Bar:
done:
Finish setting
cancel:
Cancel an entry on the menu
When “LISTINGS” is selected
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the TV program and press
[ENTER].
While recording, you cannot change from the channel being
recorded.
∫ Changing how the channel is displayed, etc.
≥You can also press [3] only to go to the
Service Bar.
SCHEDULE
∫ To watch the TV program on the selected
channel
When “LISTINGS” is selected
1 Press [SUB MENU].
Listings Options menu is displayed (➡ left).
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [2, 1] or [ENTER]
to change the setting.
video:
The highlighted program is displayed in the
Video window if you select “unlocked”.
The program in the Video window will not
be changed if you select “locked”.
channel ID:
Select how channels are displayed (e.g.,
logo, number or both)
edit channels:
Customizing channel line-up (➡ 34,
Change channel display)
∫ To shortcut to a desired item
When “LISTINGS” is selected
1 Press the numbered buttons to select the number you want
to shortcut to. (e.g., channel 26, 6 hours ahead)
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and then press [ENTER] to
shortcut.
go to channel:
The highlighted item jumps to the current
listings for the desired channel
hours ahead:
The highlighted item jumps ahead the
number of hours entered
hours back:
The highlighted item jumps back the
number of hours entered
days ahead:
The highlighted item jumps ahead the
number of days entered
days back:
The highlighted item jumps back the
number of days entered
Continued on next page
RQT8365
31
EH55English.book Page 32 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Utilizing the TV Guide On ScreenTM system
Refer to the control reference on page 28.
Using the LISTINGS Service to set
scheduled recording and scheduled
reminder
When “LISTINGS” is selected in step 3 on page 31
LISTINGS screen is displayed.
You can set scheduled recording and scheduled reminder. You can
also view titles selected from the program listings.
SCHEDULE
LISTINGS
8:00
TODAY
8:00PM
You can set the channel to change automatically when a program
set for scheduled reminder starts. This will prevent you from missing
a program you want to watch while you are watching another
program.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “set reminder” and press [ENTER].
Remind Options menu is displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [2, 1] to change
the setting.
Remind Options
frequency:
once/regularly/weekly/off
SEARCH
8:30
To make scheduled reminder
INFO
auto tune:
Choose whether the channel changes
automatically or not when a scheduled
reminder starts
when:
Set the start time for a scheduled reminder.
(e.g., On time or up to 15 minutes before/after
the start time of the program)
8:30PM
NTV
Channel
pTV
≥You can set how the
channels are
displayed on screen
(➡ 31, right column).
TV
NWBG
ducation
BOX
ANiMe
Network
PBS
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the TV program and press
[SUB MENU].
Episode Options menu is displayed.
Episode Options
go to Service Bar
watch now
set recording
To make scheduled recording (➡ below)
set reminder
To make scheduled reminder (➡ right)
cancel
≥Other Episode Options (➡ right)
3 Press [3, 4] to select “schedule reminder” and press
[ENTER].
Return to the LISTINGS screen.
“ ” appears in the list to indicate that the program is set for
scheduled reminder.
∫ When the notification message appears on the
television screen
If you set the reminder, a program notification message
(➡ below) is displayed on the television screen at the time the
reminder is set for.
Select whether to continue watching the current channel or change
the channel to the program you want to watch.
Reminder!
To make scheduled recording
1 Press [3, 4] to select “set recording” and press [ENTER].
Record Options menu is displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [2, 1] to change
the setting.
Record Options
frequency:
once/regularly/weekly/off
start:
end:
On time/1~120 min late/120~1 min early
recorder:
HDD/DVD/use default
≥When the recording drive is “DVD” and
there is not enough remaining space,
recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (➡ 30, Relief Recording).
quality:
XP/SP/LP/EP/FR
3 Press [3, 4] to select “schedule recording” and press
[ENTER].
Return to the LISTINGS screen.
“
” appears in the list to indicate that the program is set for
scheduled recording.
≥Notes on scheduled recording (➡ 30)
hide reminders
GLOB 19 GLOB, Channel 19
KSBN 18 KSBN, Channel 18
3:30pm
3:30pm
To change the channel to the program you watch
Press [3, 4] to select the channel and press [ENTER].
≥If you turn “auto tune” on in step 2 above, press [ENTER] only to
change the channel automatically.
To cancel the notification message and continue watching the
current channel
Press [3, 4] to select “hide reminders” and press [ENTER].
[Note]
You cannot set a scheduled recording and a scheduled reminder for
the same time on different channels.
Other Episode Options
You can configure the individual settings of the program listings.
When Episode Options menu is displayed (➡ left)
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER] to change
the setting.
Items that can be set up differ depending on the situation.
watch now:
Change the television screen to the selected
program
tune to channel: Choose whether the channel changes
automatically or not when the selected program
starts
set recording:
Set a program for scheduled recording
(➡ left, To make scheduled recording)
delete
recording:
Delete a program set for scheduled recording
edit recording:
Change the previously set recording settings
(➡ left, Record Options)
set reminder:
Set a scheduled reminder (➡ above, To make
scheduled reminder)
delete reminder: Delete a scheduled reminder
RQT8365
32
edit reminder:
Change the previously set scheduled reminder
settings (➡ above, Remind Options)
9:28 PM
Using the SEARCH Service to search
TV programs by genre, keyword, etc.
When “SEARCH” is selected in step 3 on page 31
SEARCH screen is displayed.
The SEARCH service displays program listings sorted into your
preferred categories.
There are various categories, such as movies, sports, children’s,
educational, news, variety, series, HDTV, keyword and alphabetically.
Each category will contain individual minor categories.
LISTINGS
SEARCH
SETUP
Search Options
type:
Select a search type (e.g., actor, director)
category:
Select a program category (e.g., movies,
sports)
sub:
Select a program sub category (e.g., action,
baseball)
enter keyword:
Enter a keyword (➡ below, KEYWORD input
screen)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “enter keyword” in Search Options
menu and press [ENTER].
KEYWORD input screen is displayed.
DONE
HDTV
KEYWORD
ALPHABETICAL
Major category (➡ below)
KEYWORD (➡ below,
right)
B
C
D
E
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
Y
Z
0
V W X
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
'
BKSP
To search TV programs by genre
1 Press [2, 1] to select the major category.
LISTINGS
ALPHABETICAL
All
Action
Animated
Comedy
Documentary
Drama
Fantasy
Horror
SEARCH
MOVIES
SETUP
SPORTS
Musical
Mystery
Romance
Science Fiction
War
Western
Other
All
Major category
Minor category
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the minor category and press
[ENTER].
Search starts, and the programs that apply are displayed in the
list.
≥If there are no programs that apply, “No match found” is displayed.
≥When sorting alphabetically, programs with the same name
(such as reruns or subsequent broadcasts of the same
program) are displayed together in one column.
In this case, press [3, 4] to select a program name and press
[ENTER]. Each broadcast of the program is then displayed separately.
3 Press [3, 4] to select a program and press [ENTER].
Episode Options menu (➡ 32, left column) is displayed.
You can now set the scheduled recording or scheduled reminder (➡ 32).
To search TV programs by new keyword
You can also perform a more detailed search when you enter a new
keyword.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “KEYWORD” and press [SUB MENU].
Keyword Options
go to Service Bar
sort by keyword
new search
new search
done
cancel
CANCEL
A
SPACE
DEL
8
F
9
SPACE: Creates one open character
BKSP: Deletes the character on the left
DEL: Deletes the character on the right
CLR: Deletes all characters
Utilizing the TV Guide On ScreenTM system
EH55English.book Page 33 Thursday, April 6, 2006
'
CLR
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a letter and press [ENTER].
Repeat step 1 as necessary.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “DONE” and press [ENTER] to finish
entering.
Search starts, and the programs that apply are displayed in the list.
≥If there are no programs that apply, “No match found” is displayed.
≥The newly input keywords are all saved. If you search for a keyword
and no match is found the input keyword is saved.
5 Press [3, 4] to select a program and press [ENTER].
Episode Options menu (➡ 32, left column) is displayed.
You can now set the scheduled recording or scheduled reminder
(➡ 32).
To search TV programs by saved keyword
1 Press [2, 1] to select “KEYWORD”.
LISTINGS
HDTV
title
title
SEARCH
KEYWORD
WORLDS END
CANDY
SETUP
ALPHABETICAL
Saved keyword
(➡ below)
2 Press [3, 4] to select a saved keyword and press [ENTER].
Search starts, and the programs that apply are displayed in the
list.
≥If there are no programs that apply, “No match found” is
displayed.
3 Press [3, 4] to select a program and press [ENTER] to view
a list of episodes.
4 Press [3, 4] to select the episode and press [ENTER].
Episode Options menu (➡ 32, left column) is displayed.
You can now set the scheduled recording or scheduled reminder
(➡ 32).
∫ To change the saved keyword or search
parameters
2 Press [3, 4] to select “new search” and press [ENTER].
Search Options menu (➡ right) is displayed.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item (type, category or sub) and
press [2, 1] to select the setting.
Items that can be set up differ depending on the situation.
For example, set as shown below when you want to search for
action movies that feature Green.
type: actor
category: movies
sub: action
enter keyword: GREEN
[Note]
Depending on the TV Guide On ScreenTM text data, a keyword
search may not be able to find applicable results.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “KEYWORD”.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the saved keyword and press
[SUB MENU].
Search Options menu is displayed.
Items that can be set up differ depending on the situation.
edit search:
Change the saved keyword setting
delete search:
Delete the saved keyword
3 Press [3, 4] to select “edit search” and press [ENTER].
Repeat steps 3–5 (➡ left, To search TV programs by new
keyword).
Continued on next page
RQT8365
33
EH55English.book Page 34 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Utilizing the TV Guide On ScreenTM system
Refer to the control reference on page 28.
Using SETUP Service to change the
settings of the TV Guide On ScreenTM
system
When “SETUP” is selected in step 3 on page 31
SETUP screen is displayed.
The SETUP service allows you to redo the channel settings,
customize the channel line-up and set the TV Guide On ScreenTM
system’s start-up pattern.
SEARCH
SETUP
SCHEDULE
Change system settings
Change channel display
Change default options
Display setup progress
Grid Options
go back to Setup
position
1
on
channel
2
done
cancel
re-sort numerically
undo all changes
Press [SUB MENU] to return to the previous screen.
Change system settings
(➡ below)
Change channel display
(➡ below)
Change default options
(➡ right)
Display setup progress
(➡ 35)
SETUP
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel to customize and press
[ENTER].
Grid Options menu is displayed.
Items that can be set up differ depending on the situation.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [2, 1], [ENTER]
or the numbered buttons to change the setting.
Grid Options
position:
Change the position where the channel
appears in the LISTINGS screen (and
CHANNEL EDITOR)
channel:
on: Channel is always displayed in
LISTINGS and SEARCH screen
off: Channel is never displayed in
LISTINGS and SEARCH screen
auto-hide: Display a channel only when
program information is available
service:
Change the service for the channel if there
is more than one service available (e.g.,
cable, over-the-air, antenna, DirecTV, etc.)
input:
Change the input for the channel if there is
more than one input (e.g., RF, IN3, etc.)
tune channel:
Correct the tune channel number using the
numbered buttons
re-sort
numerically:
Change the channel order in the LISTINGS
screen (and CHANNEL EDITOR) to
numeric
undo all changes:
Reset all channel editor options (and
LISTINGS screen) to their original settings
Access to the TV Guide On ScreenTM system
setup screen–“Change system settings”
You can verify any information entered during setup, or completely
redo the setup, for the TV Guide On ScreenTM system.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Change system settings” and press
[ENTER].
The information that was set is displayed, and you are asked to
confirm whether it is correct.
ZIP Code - 11111 (USA)
Cable on "RF"
Are the above settings correct?
Yes, everything is correct
Yes, but my channel lineup is incorrect
No, repeat setup process
2 Press [3, 4] to select the message and press [ENTER].
≥“Yes, everything is correct”
–The information that was set will remain intact.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Next” and press [ENTER] to
exit the screen.
≥“Yes, but my channel lineup is incorrect”
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Next” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select one of the channel lineups
and press [ENTER].
Then follow the operation instructions given on screen.
≥“No, repeat setup process”
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Next” and press [ENTER].
–The TV Guide On ScreenTM system setup screen is displayed.
Follow the on-screen prompts to redo the setup (➡ 20,
step 4).
Change the initial settings–“Change default
options”
You can change the size of the Information box etc., scheduled
recording, and scheduled reminder default settings.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Change default options” and press
[ENTER].
SEARCH
SETUP
SCHEDULE
SETUP: CHANGE DEFAULT OPTIONS
General defaults
Record defaults
Remind defaults
Go back to Setup
Options
Customizing the channel line-up –“Change
channel display”
You can customize the channel line-up. You can easily change
channel line-up should the cable company occasionally revise their
channel assignments.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Change channel display” and press
[ENTER].
CHANNEL EDITOR
screen
CHANNEL EDITOR
1 ON pTV PTV-S
2 ON TV
TV-TR
3 ON NWBG NWBG
Cable
Cable
Cable
2
5
12
∫ To change the channel position
RQT8365
34
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel.
2 Press [2] to select the far left column.
3 Press [3, 4] to change the position.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press [ENTER].
Items for each option are displayed (➡ 35).
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [2, 1] to change
the setting.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “done” and press [ENTER].
Continued on next page
General defaults
box size:
9:28 PM
To change the previously set scheduled recording
or scheduled reminder
Change the size of the Information box
box position:
Change the position of the Information box
video:
The highlighted program is displayed in the
Video window if you select “unlocked”.
The program in the Video window will not
be changed if you select “locked”.
channel ID:
Change how channels are displayed (e.g.,
logo, number or both)
auto guide:
Choose whether the TV GUIDE screen is
displayed automatically or not when you
turn on this unit.
Record defaults
start:
1
Press [2, 1] to select “TO DO” and press [3, 4] to select
the program and press [SUB MENU].
Schedule Options menu is displayed.
Schedule Options
go to Service Bar
tune to channel
delete recording
edit recording
≥Other Schedule
Options (➡ below)
Change the start time for scheduled recording
end:
Change the end time for scheduled recording
recorder:
Select the recording drive
quality:
Select the recording mode
Remind defaults
auto tune:
Choose whether the channel changes
automatically or not when a scheduled
reminder starts
when:
Set the start time for a scheduled reminder.
(e.g., On time or up to 15 minutes before/after
the start time of the program)
Display progress in getting TV Guide On
ScreenTM data–“Display setup progress”
Check progress in obtaining TV Guide On ScreenTM data. If there is
a check placed beside “channel lineup data”, you can make
scheduled recordings and scheduled reminder from the program
listings grid.
Press [3, 4] to select “Display setup progress” and press [ENTER].
SEARCH
SETUP
2 Press [3, 4] to select “edit recording” or “edit reminder”
and press [ENTER].
Record Options (➡ 29, step4, ➡ 32) or Remind Options (➡ 32) is
displayed.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [2, 1] or the
numbered buttons to change the setting.
4 Press [3] to select “schedule recording” or “schedule
reminder” and press [ENTER].
Items that can be set up differ depending on the situation.
Other Schedule Options
sort by:
Sort the items by date, title or event
watch now:
Change the television screen to the selected
program
tune to channel:
Choose whether the channel changes
automatically or not when the selected
program starts
new manual
recording:
Set a program for manual recording (➡ 29)
set recording:
Set a program for scheduled recording (➡ 32,
To make scheduled recording)
delete recording:
Delete a program set for scheduled recording
new manual
reminder:
Set a manual reminder
set reminder:
Set a scheduled reminder (➡ 32, To make
scheduled reminder)
delete reminder:
Delete a scheduled reminder
SCHEDULE
INFO
TV Guide On Screen Setup Progress
edit recording
set reminder
cancel
Utilizing the TV Guide On ScreenTM system
EH55English.book Page 35 Thursday, April 6, 2006
Note: It may take up to 24 hours to start receiving listings.
STEP
STATUS
search for time
Y search for TV stations
with TV Guide data
Y search for channel lineup
listings transmission
Done: 7:31pm
Done
Y
Done
In Progress
History Options
Press [ENTER] to close the screen.
Using SCHEDULE Service to check,
change or delete a program set for
scheduled recording or scheduled
reminder manually
When “SCHEDULE” is selected in step 3 on page 31
SCHEDULE screen is displayed.
The SCHEDULE service displays programs registered for recording
and scheduled reminders on the list. You can sort the list, delete
programs, change the frequency/recording drive or modify the start/
end times of programs selected.
≥You can manually set the scheduled recording (➡ 29) and scheduled
reminder if the program listings have not been downloaded.
SETUP
TO DO
Golf
Dodzilla
Bull house
Be switched
Baseball
SCHEDULE
LISTINGS
History Options
view as:
Display recorded programs in groups or lists
sort by:
Sort recorded programs by date or title
delete episode
history:
Delete recording history of the selected
program
delete all history:
Delete history of all recordings listed in the
History screen (including recordings about to
begin or in progress)
TO DO (➡ right)
HISTORY (➡ right)
HISTORY
Thu 10/16 1:00 pm
Thu 10/16 2:00 pm
Thu 10/16 3:00 pm
Thu 10/16 3:30 pm
Thu 10/16 4:00 pm
You can view the scheduled recordings history. Information about
scheduled recordings that were not performed is displayed in the
INFO screen.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “HISTORY” and press [SUB MENU].
History Options menu is displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [2, 1] or [ENTER]
to change the setting.
Items that can be set up differ depending on the situation.
W
W
RQT8365
35
EH55English.book Page 36 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
3
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE
k1.3
1.3
S VIDEO VIDEO L/MONO-AUDIO-R
DV IN
IN2
1∫ 3
2
DVD
1
Numbered
buttons
POWER
TV
Í
POWER
VOLUME
CH
CH
SUB MENU
≥Thumbnail Mode
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
3
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER
2;, ;1
B Picture
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
10 10/27 Mon
8 10/27 Mon
---
---
Rec. Length
0:52(SP)
---
Info
2
B
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
CM SKIP
STATUS
≥16:9 aspect images will be recorded as 4:3 images if recorded
under the following conditions:
–If recorded to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Enable High-Speed
Mode” set to “On” in the Setup menu (The default setting is
“On” ➡ 61).
–If recorded or copied to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc.
You may be able to adjust it by changing the display mode on
your television. Please refer to the television’s operating
instructions.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit.
≥It is possible to watch playback from one drive while
recording on another (editing is not possible).
If you selected the DVD drive
Page 02/02
SUB MENU
No. Ch.
001
23
002
23
003
86
004
86
005
8
006
10
007
10
008
8
---
A Video
Date
10/24
10/25
10/25
10/25
10/26
10/27
10/27
10/27
B Picture
Day
Start Title Name
Fri 3:30 PM
Sat 8:15 AM
Sat 10:00 AM
Sat 10:05 PM
Sun 4:10 PM
Mon 9:25 AM
Mon 1:30 PM
Mon 9:00 PM
Page 01/01
Next
Select Previous
Next
[HDD] [RAM]
Press the “A” button
to select “Video”.
Play
S SUB MENU
Select
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Title View
HDD
007
008
10 10/27 Mon
8 10/27 Mon
A Video
B Picture
---
[HDD] To sort Title View for easy searching (Table Mode only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to
playback from many titles.
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
If you select an item other than “No.”
≥The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the
selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)
≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being
playback.
≥If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to the “Picture”
Direct Navigator screen, the sorted Title View will be canceled.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press
[ENTER].
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons.
[HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
e.g., 5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15:
[1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER]. (Thumbnail Mode only)
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Direct Navigator screen icons
Title protected.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥How to insert a disc (➡ 13).
S
Title View
HDD
Switching the Direct Navigator appearance
1 Press [SUB MENU] while Thumbnail Mode is displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Table Mode” and press [ENTER].
≥The display appearance used last is saved even after the unit is
turned off.
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
∫ If the video is stretched vertically
2
008
Previous
CREATE
CHAPTER
1
A Video
---
007
Play
S
REC
≥Table Mode
SCHEDULE
TV GUIDE
A
Title View
HDD
6,5
AUDIO
“A”, AUDIO
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DELETE
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
VCR Plusi
Plus
:,9
;
TIME SLIP
Selecting recorded programs (titles) to play–Direct
Navigator
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
∫
≥When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the
protect position (➡ 56), play automatically starts when
inserted in the unit.
Í
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
PLAY
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
DivX (➡ 7)
DivX menu screen appears (➡ 39).
REC
DRIVE
SELECT
CH
REC
Press [1] (PLAY).
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection (Digital broadcasts, etc.)
t
Title cannot be played
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged, etc.]
[
Currently recording.
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(➡ 30, Relief Recording)
RQT8365
36
Title with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 76,
CPRM)
9:28 PM
∫ When a menu screen appears on the television
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [ENTER].
Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
e.g., 5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
≥To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] or [SUB MENU].
[DVD-A] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[VCD] Press [RETURN].
≥Depending on the type of disc, playback methods will differ. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
[Note]
≥It is not possible to play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen, pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television screen
and so on.
Operations during play
Press [∫].
Stop
Pause
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
Stopped position
≥If [∫] is pressed several times the position is cleared.
≥The position is cleared if the tray is opened (excluding [HDD]).
≥[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX: The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Playing backPlaying recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
EH55English.book Page 37 Thursday, April 6, 2006
Press [;].
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Press [6] or [5].
Search
The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps).
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥Audio is heard during first level of forward search.
[DVD-A] (excluding moving picture parts) [CD] and MP3: Audio is heard during all levels of search.
DivX: Audio is not heard during all levels of search.
≥Depending on the type of the disc, search may not be possible.
During play or while paused, press [:] or [9].
Skip
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
≥DivX: Backward direction [:] only.
Press the numbered buttons.
Starting from a
selected item
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or track.
≥[HDD] MP3 and JPEG/TIFF
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥[DVD-A] Selecting groups
While stopped (screen saver is displayed on the television ➡ right)
e.g., 5: [5]
≥Other discs (You can select a track with DVD-Audio.)
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
≥This works only when stopped (screen saver is displayed on the television ➡ above) with some
discs.
≥[VCD] (with playback control)
If you press the numbered buttons while stopped (the above screen saver is displayed on the
television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play time appears on the unit’s display.)
Quick View
[HDD] [RAM]
Slow-motion
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
Play speed is quicker than normal.
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
While paused, press [6] or [5].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only)
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is continued for approximately 5 minutes (excluding [DVD-V]
[DVD-A] [VCD]).
Frame-by-frame
While paused, press [2] (2;) or [1] (;1).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only)
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Each press shows the next frame.
≥Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
Continued on next page
RQT8365
37
EH55English.book Page 38 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Refer to the control reference on page 36.
Skipping the specified
time (Time Slip)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the
time and press [ENTER].
-5 min
Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the
time increases [3] or decreases
[4] by 1 minute intervals. (Press
and hold for 10-minute intervals.)
CM Skip
Press [CM SKIP].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Each time you press, play restarts approximately a minute later.
This automatically
disappears after
approximately 5 seconds.
To show the screen again
press [TIME SLIP] again.
Simple editing operations during play
Create chapters
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
(➡ 44, Title/Chapter)
[HDD] [RAM]
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a chapter.
Changing audio during play
Status messages
Press [AUDIO].
Press [STATUS].
The display changes each time you press the button.
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX (➡ 7)
Stereo>Mono L>Mono R
^-----------------------------}
e.g., “Stereo” is
selected
HDD Hard-Drive
Play
HDD Hard-Drive
Rec.
Play
Stereo
Copying 80%
≥When playing an SAP broadcast recorded on the HDD, DVD-RAM,
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format): Main Audio ()SAP Audio
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (➡ 42, Soundtrack).
Soundtrack
1 ENG
Stereo
Selected drive/type of disc
Recording or play status/input
channel
Audio type
Recording drive/
Copy progress indicator
Title number and elapsed time during play/
Recording mode
Available recording time
Date and time
and recording mode
πRemain
6/8 10:15 PM
π T2
π T1 0:05.14 XP
Î Digital 3/2.1ch
e.g., English is selected.
Title number and elapsed time during
recording/Recording mode
[Note]
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.
≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio for XP Recording” is
set to “LPCM” (➡ 62).
≥When “Enable High-Speed Mode” is set to “On” (➡ 61).
(The default setting is “On”.)
RQT8365
38
0:50 XP
0:00.10 XP
No display
EH55English.book Page 39 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
DVD
Í DVD POWER
POWER
TV
Í
POWER
4
Í
If “DivX Menu” is selected: Go to “Playing DivX discs” step 2 in
the below column.
If “MP3 Music” is selected: Go to “Playing MP3 discs” step 2
on page 40.
If “Pictures” is selected: Go to “Playing still pictures” step 4 on
page 41.
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
DRIVE SELECT
Press [3, 4] to select playback mode
and press [ENTER].
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numbered
buttons
SKIP
CH
VCR Plus
Plusi
DELETE
:,9
∫
Playing DivX discs
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
STOP
6,5
[-R] [CD]
≥You can play DVD-R and CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain DivX
video contents that have been recorded on a computer.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
FUNCTIONS
1
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
SCHEDULE
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
ENTER
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
TV GUIDE
RETURN
S
AUDIO
DISPLAY
A
B
REC
CREATE
CHAPTER
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
Folder1 : 00025
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
001
Tree
Name of Title
No.
ABC.avi
Info
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
“B”
STATUS
Page
001/001
Total title : 001
ENTER
Selecting file type to play
[CD]
You can play CD-R/CD-RW which contain MP3 files, DivX video
contents or still pictures that have been recorded on a computer.
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc
containing DivX video contents, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG/
TIFF).
≥Files are treated as titles.
≥When the MP3 or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps
1–4 in “To select file type” on the left column and select
“DivX Menu” in step 4 to change the playback mode.
2
Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [ENTER].
Play starts on the selected title.
≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
e.g.,
Playback mode is set to DivX.
To play another type of files,
please select playback mode
from Menu in FUNCTIONS.
ENTER
≥When playing the file displayed on the screen
Press [ENTER].
≥When you want to play files other than the one displayed on the
screen
Follow the steps below.
Press [RETURN].
Press [FUNCTIONS].
FUNCTIONS
CD (DivX/MP3/JPEG)
Menu
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[Note]
To select file type
1
2
To stop playing
Press [∫].
//Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs/Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the appropriate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
≥Successive play is not available.
≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD
drive.
Playback mode : DivX
Menu
Using the tree screen to find a folder
Program
1
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
RETURN
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Menu” and
press [ENTER].
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
F 1/21
12.02.2004
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
DATA1
DATA2
Multimedia content
Music and pictures on disc.
Please select playback mode.
DivX Menu
Select Folder
ENTER
MP3 Music
Pictures
ENTER
You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.
2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [ENTER].
The file list for the folder appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
RQT8365
39
EH55English.book Page 40 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Playing DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
Refer to the control reference on page 39.
About DivX VOD content
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first
need to register the unit.
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to
enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit.
For more information about DivX VOD, visit www.divx.com/vod
Display the unit’s registration code.
(➡ 60, “DivX Registration” in “Setup” tab)
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DivX Registration
Using the tree screen to find a group
DivX (R) Video On Demand
Channel
Setup
To stop playing
Press [∫].
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod
8 alphanumeric characters
1
While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a track is highlighted
to display the tree screen.
Selected group No. /Total groups
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed
as group number.
ENTER
≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorization Error” is displayed.)
Menu
G
8
T
14
Total
40/111
Tree
MP3 music
No.
0 – 9
ENTER
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired” is displayed.)
≥You cannot select groups that contain no compatible files.
When playing this content
≥The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
–you press [Í DVD POWER].
–you press [∫].
–you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content
or the start of the content being played.
–scheduled recording starts on the HDD.
–you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
≥Resume functions do not work.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Playing MP3 discs
[CD]
≥You can play CD-R/CD-RW discs which contain MP3 files that have
been recorded on a computer.
≥You may not be able to playback MP3 which contain still pictures.
2
1
Press [3, 4] to select a group and
press [ENTER].
The file list for the group appears.
Playing still pictures
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] [CD]
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB (➡ 6).
≥You can play still pictures recorded onto a CD-R/CD-RW on a
computer.
≥You cannot playback still pictures while recording or copying.
≥Inserting, Removing the SD card (➡ 10)
While stopped, put the card in the slot and the menu (➡ below) is
automatically displayed. Press [3, 4] to select “Go to Album View” and
then press [ENTER] to display the Album View screen shown in step 2.
SD Card Operations
SD Card inserted.
Select an action or press RETURN.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Go to Album View
Copy pictures
Copy video (MPEG2)
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
ENTER
Selected group
G: Group No.
T: Track No. in the group
Total: Track No./Total
tracks in all groups
Menu
G
1
T
1
Total
1/111
No.
0 – 9
Prev.
Next
ENTER
No.
Group
1 : My favorite
Total
Track
001 Both Ends Freezing
1
002 Lady Starfish
2
003 Life on Jupiter
3
004 Metal Glue
4
005 Paint It Yellow
5
006 Pyjamamama
6
007 Shrimps from Mars
7
008 Starry Blue
8
009 Velvet Cuppermine
9
010 Ziggy Starfish
10
1
Tree
Page 001/024
≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
≥When the DivX or JPEG Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4 in
“To select file type” on page 39 selecting “MP3 Music” in step 4 to
change to the playback mode.
Press [DRIVE SELECT]
to select the HDD, DVD
or SD drive.
40
Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [ENTER].
Play starts on the selected track.
≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.
HDD
DVD
SD
e.g., SD
card drive
The indicator lights up on the unit.
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Album View
A Video
HDD
008
3/10/05 Total8
Photo: 3/10/2005
4/10/05 Total6
My Album2
---
---
ENTER
Slideshow
Album View screen
Recording date of the first
picture in the album/number of
pictures/album name.
---
Page 02/02
S SUB MENU
B Picture
---
007
Previous
2
RQT8365
G 7/25
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard number
001 Piano solo
002 Vocal
Next
Press ENTER to go to
Picture View
≥Depending on the digital camera or the editing software on the
PC etc., the information about the recording date may not be
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].
[HDD] [RAM] If “Video” title view is displayed, press the “B”
button to switch to the “Picture” view screen.
9:28 PM
[CD]
Pictures Menu
Picture View screen
Picture View
CD (JPEG)
Folder
100__DVD
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
---
---
---
Previous
Page 01/01
Next
Play
(Go to step 4)
When the DivX or MP3 Menu is displayed, perform steps 1–4
in “To select file type” on page 39 and select “Pictures” in step
4 to change the playback mode.
Useful functions during still picture
play
You can display still pictures one by one at a
Start
constant interval.
Slideshow [HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Slideshow While the Album View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select
Start Slideshow
settings
the album and press
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
[CD]
Direct Navigator screen icons
Picture protected.
Picture in which the number of prints is set (DPOF)
(➡ 48, 76).
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To select the still pictures in another folder ➡ below
3
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [ENTER].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Picture View
A
HDD
Video
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
----
----
----
Previous
Play
S
B
Picture
e.g., HDD
Photo: 3/10/2005
Album Name
Page 001/001
SUB MENU
Next
Select
You can also select album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
4
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [ENTER].
Rotate
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
[CD]
ENTER
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.
e.g., [HDD] [RAM] [SD]
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
e.g., [CD]
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (➡ right).
To return to the Album View or Picture View screen
Press [RETURN].
Zoom in
Zoom out
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
[CD]
∫ To select the still pictures in another folder
(➡ 76, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
[RAM] [SD]
To switch to another higher folder
(Only if there is a multiple number of higher folders recognizable)
1 While the Album View is displayed
Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Root folder” and press
[ENTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select the
Select Root folder
higher folder and press
Select folder to access.
[ENTER].
\DCIM
Press ENTER to confirm.
[CD]
1 While the Picture View screen is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
Pictures Menu
001
021216_0026
100__DVD
002
003
004
103_DVD
104_DVD
0005
ENTER
≥To return the picture to its
original size, press [3, 4] to
select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press
[ENTER].
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available
for still pictures smaller than 640k480 pixels.
∫ To show the picture properties
Press [STATUS] twice.
Shooting date
11 / 10 6:53 PM
Folder - Picture # :
Date:
11 / 12 / 2005
102 - 0001
No. : 3 /
9
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS].
Picture View
CD (JPEG)
Folder
Slideshow settings
[1] (PLAY).
You can also start slideshow
with the following steps.
While the Album View screen is displayed
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired
album and press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and
press [ENTER].
[CD]
While the Picture View screen is displayed
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the “Folder”
and press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow”
and press [ENTER].
≥To change the display interval
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow settings”
in step 2 and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Display Interval” and
press [2, 1] to select the desired interval
(0–30 seconds) and press [ENTER].
≥Repeat Play
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow settings”
in step 2 and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play” and
press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and
press [ENTER].
While playing
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select
Rotate Right
“Rotate Right” or “Rotate
Rotate Left
Left” and press [ENTER].
≥Rotation information will not
be stored.
–[CD] Still pictures
–When disc or album is protected
–When played on other equipment
–When copying pictures
≥If you remove the SD card while the Picture
View screen is displayed, picture rotation
information may not be properly stored. Make
sure that you do not remove the SD card until
the screen has closed.
While playing
1 Press [SUB MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select
Rotate Right
“Zoom in” and press
Rotate Left
[ENTER].
Zoom in
Playing backPlaying DivX discs, MP3 discs and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)
EH55English.book Page 41 Thursday, April 6, 2006
0006
0007
008
F 1/3
RQT8365
41
EH55English.book Page 42 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Using on-screen menus
POWER
TV
POWER
DRIVE SELECT
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
➡ 38, Changing audio during play
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
Angle§ [DVD-V] [DVD-A]
CH
Change the number to select an angle.
Still-P (Still picture) [DVD-A]
VCR Plus
Plusi
DELETE
Selects the play method for still pictures.
Slide Show:Plays according to the default order on the disc.
Page:
Select the still picture number and play.
≥Random: Plays in random order.
≥Return:
Returns to the default still picture on the disc.
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
:,9
;
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
Source Select (DivX)
SCHEDULE
≥Automatic:
The constructing method of the DivX contents
is automatically distinguished and output.
≥Interlace:
Select when the disc contents were recorded
using interlace.
≥Progressive: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using progressive.
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
TV GUIDE
ENTER
SUB MENU
FUNCTIONS
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
RETURN
S
“A”
“B”, DISPLAY
AUDIO
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER
A
REC
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
B
§
You may have to use the menus (➡ 37) on the disc to make
changes.
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
Common procedures
1
Press [DISPLAY].
Disc
Play
Video
Audio
Other
Menu
Soundtrack
1
Î Digital 2/0ch
Subtitle
Off
Audio channel
Item
Stereo
Setting
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
2
PBC (Playback control ➡ 77) [VCD]
Info
Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [1].
3
Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [1].
4
Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [ENTER].
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
Disc menu–Setting the disc content
Audio attribute
LPCM/PPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Language
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
DAN:
POR:
RUS:
JPN:
CHI:
KOR:
MAL:
VIE:
Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels
Danish
Portuguese
Russian
Japanese
Chinese
Korean
Malay
Vietnamese
THA:
POL:
CES:
SLK:
HUN:
FIN:
¢:
Thai
Polish
Czech
Slovak
Hungarian
Finnish
Others
Play menu–Change the play sequence
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
Repeat play
≥All
≥Chapter
[CD] [VCD]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Group
[DVD-A] and MP3
≥Playlists
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Title
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
≥Track
[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] and MP3
Select “Off” to cancel.
Soundtrack§
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Select the audio and language (➡ right, Audio attribute,
Language).
DivX
Select the soundtrack number.
≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only
one audio type.
RQT8365
42
Subtitle§
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ right,
Language).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
≥If the subtitles overlap closed captions recorded on discs,
turn the subtitles off.
DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple
subtitles.
Video menu–Change the picture quality
Picture [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
To select the picture quality mode during play.
≥Normal: Default setting
≥Soft:
Soft picture with fewer video artifacts
≥Fine:
Details are sharper
≥Cinema: Mellows movies, enhances detail in dark scenes.
EH55English.book Page 43 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
DNR
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
Reduces mosaic-like distortion and picture degradation.
On ↔ Off
Progressive§ (➡ 77)
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
≥Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
≥When progressive output is on, closed captions cannot be
displayed.
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (➡ above) is set to “On”.]
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of material being played (➡ 76, Film and video).
≥Auto1 (normal):
Automatically detects the film and video content,
and appropriately converts it.
≥Auto2: In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects film
contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
≥Video: Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and the
content is distorted.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [SD]
(You cannot delete items on finalized discs.)
≥A title or a picture cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make
certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot delete while recording or copying.
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD] If you delete a recorded title (or a still picture), the
space deleted becomes available for recording.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Disc space increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase after
deletion.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 56).
1
While stopped
2
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
press [ENTER].
DELETE Navigator
Title View
A Video
HDD
007
008
10 10/27 Mon
8 10/27 Mon
---
---
B Picture
---
---
Line-in NR (Only when IN1, IN2 or IN3 is selected)
Reduces video tape noise while copying.
Depending on the video tape, jittering may occur.
≥Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input from
a video tape.
≥On:
Noise reduction works for any video input.
≥Off:
Noise reduction is off. Select when you want to
record input as is.
§
Previous
Delete
S
Page 02/02
SUB MENU
Next
Select Previous
Next
[HDD] [RAM] To switch to the other view
Press the “B” button to select “Picture”.
Press the “A” button to select “Video”.
3
Playing backUsing on-screen menus/Delete Navigator to delete titles
Delete Navigator to delete titles
Deleting a title:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title to be
deleted and press [ENTER].
Only when you have selected “480p” in “TV Type” (➡ 23).
Audio menu–Change the sound effect
Deleting an album:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album to be
deleted and press [DELETE].
V. Surround Sound [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [DVD-A] [-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital with 2 channels or more only)
Deleting a still picture:
≥Emphasis
≥Natural
≥Off
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album
which contains the still pictures to be
deleted and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
pictures to be deleted and press [ENTER].
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers
only.
≥Turn V. Surround Sound off if it causes distortion. (Check the
surround function on the connected equipment.)
≥V. Surround Sound does not work for SAP recordings.
You can confirm the titles or still pictures etc. that you have
selected using the sub menu.
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Title View” (➡ 44, step
5).
≥Refer to sub menu operations for the “Picture View” or
“Album View” (➡ 48, step 4).
Dialog Enhancer [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [-RW‹VR›] and DivX
(Dolby Digital with 3 channels or more only, including a center
channel)
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
The volume of the center channel is raised to make dialog
easier to hear.
On ↔ Off
Other menu–Change the display position
4
Position
1 (Standard)–5: The higher the setting the lower the on-screen
menu moves.
Press [2] to select “Delete” and press
[ENTER].
The title, album or the picture is deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
Deleting titles or pictures during play
1
While playing
Press [DELETE].
You cannot delete a picture during a slideshow.
2
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [ENTER].
The title or the still picture is deleted.
RQT8365
43
EH55English.book Page 44 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Editing titles/chapters
POWER
TV
POWER
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive containing
the recorded title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 56).
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
:,9
;
CH
VCR Plus
Plusi
DELETE
1
SLOW/SEARCH
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
1
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
TIONS
FU N C
ENTER
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
AUDIO
2
[HDD] [RAM]
3
Press the “A” button to select “Video”.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.
SCHEDULE
TV GUIDE
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
During play or while stopped
DISPLAY
CREATE
CHAPTER
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Title View
A Video
HDD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
007
008
10 10/27 Mon
8 10/27 Mon
---
---
B Picture
Title View screen
---
---
Info
A
B
“A”
REC REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(You cannot edit finalized discs.)
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Title/Chapter
Programs are recorded as a single title consisting of one chapter.
Title
Chapter
Start
End
4
5
Press [SUB MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [ENTER].
≥If you select “Edit Title”, press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [ENTER] (➡ 45).
[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters.
Each section between the division points becomes a chapter.
(➡ 38, 45)
Title
Title Name
Set Protection
Cancel Protection
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Shorten Title
Delete Title
Change Thumbnail
Properties
Divide Title
Edit Title
View Chapters
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a
playlist (➡ 46).
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8minute) chapters after finalizing (➡ 58).
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] Even if you finalize the disc, chapters are not
automatically divided. However, if you copied titles in high
speed the chapters are copied from the source title.
≥The maximum number of items on a disc
[HDD]
–Titles:
500
–Chapters:
Approximately 1000 per title
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
–Titles:
99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
–Chapters:
Approximately 1000
([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approximately 250)
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[Note]
≥Once deleted, divided or shortened, recorded content cannot be
restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title, etc).
≥[+R] [+R]DL] Management information is recorded in unused
sections when you edit discs. The available space on these discs
decreases each time you edit their contents.
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
Editing titles/chapters and playing
chapters
RQT8365
44
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded
programs.
Refer to “Title
operations” (➡ 45).
Switching the Direct Navigator
appearance ➡ 36
Playing still pictures
➡ 41, step 3
Table Mode
Album View
≥Items that cannot be selected turn grey.
If you select “View Chapters”
6
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the chapter.
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 7.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Chapter View
A Video
HDD
B Picture
Chapter View screen
008 8 10/27 Mon
001
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:00.00
---
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ above)
7
Press [SUB MENU], then [3, 4] to
select the operation and press [ENTER].
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Refer to “Chapter
operations” (➡ 45).
View Titles
≥You can go back to the Title View.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
9:28 PM
Title operations
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ 44)
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
Delete Title§
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The available recording space does not increase when you delete titles.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It does not
increase if other titles are deleted.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [ENTER] to exit the screen.
Properties
Editing titles/chapters
EH55English.book Page 45 Thursday, April 6, 2006
Properties
Dinosaur
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Number 001
Start
10:00 AM
Date
6/20/2005 Wed Rec. Length 2:15 (SP)
Channel 4
ENTER
Title Name
You can give names to recorded titles.
➡ 59, Entering text
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
If set, this will protect the title from accidental erasure.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Set Protection§
Cancel Protection§
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
≥When the title is protected, some items cannot be accessed.
Release the protection to access the inaccessible items.
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can remove unnecessary parts of the recording.
1 Press [ENTER] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
Shorten Title
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, “For quicker
editing”)
Title View
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
007
008
10 10/27 Mon
8 10/27 Mon
---
---
Shorten Title
A Video
HDD
008
Play
B Picture
Start
End
Next
Exit
≥Select “Next” and press [ENTER] to delete other sections.
0:43.21
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
ENTER
You can change the image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title View.
1 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2 Press [ENTER] when the image you want to use as a
thumbnail is shown.
Change Thumbnail
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(➡ below, “For quicker
editing”)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
A Video
HDD
B Picture
008
Change
Exit
0:00.00
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [ENTER] at
the point you want to change.
Start play and select
the thumbnail position
Change
--:--.-ENTER
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
You can divide a title into two.
1 Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide the title.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [ENTER].
Divide Title
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Divide Title
A Video
HDD
B Picture
Play
008
Preview
Divide
Exit
0:43.21
To confirm the division point
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [ENTER]. (The unit plays 10
seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [ENTER] at the point where you want to divide the title.
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, “For quicker
editing”)
Divide
-- : -- . --
ENTER
[Note]
≥The divided titles retain the name and CPRM property (➡ 76) of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily be cut out.
§
Multiple editing is possible.
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ 44)
Delete Chapter§
[HDD] [RAM]
Create Chapter
[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, “For quicker
editing”)
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥To delete only the chapter division point, use “Combine Chapters” (➡ below). The recorded contents are
not deleted.
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the
title.
1 Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Create Chapter
A Video
HDD
008
B Picture
Play
Create
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
Exit
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Exit” and press [ENTER].
0:43.21
ENTER
Combine
Chapters [HDD] [RAM]
§
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [ENTER].
≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.
Multiple editing is possible.
For quicker editing
≥Use search, slow-motion (➡ 37) or Time Slip (➡ 38) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 37) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 37).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
RQT8365
45
EH55English.book Page 46 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Creating, editing and playing playlists
POWER
TV
POWER
4
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”
and press [ENTER].
CH
PLAYLISTS
Playlist View
HDD
VCR Plus
Plusi
--
DELETE
--
--
--
--
Create
SLOW/SEARCH
--
:,9
PAUSE
STOP
;
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
5
SCHEDULE
TV GUIDE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FUNCTIONS
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT
NAVIGATOR
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
AUDIO
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER
A
“B”
REC
≥Press [ENTER] to select all the chapters in the title, then
skip to step 7.
3,4,2,1
ENTER
PLAYLISTS
Create
HDD
001 8 10/27 Mon
Source Title
RETURN
S
SUB MENU
Press [2, 1] to select the source title
and press [4].
001
Page 001/001
002
---
---
003
---
Info
B
Source Chapter
002
001
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
Page 001/001
Chapters in Playlist
You can arrange the chapters (➡ 44) to create a playlist.
Title
Title
Chapter Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
6
Chapter
Page 001/001
Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you
want to add to a playlist and press
[ENTER].
Press [3] to cancel.
PLAYLISTS
Playlist
Chapter
Create
HDD
Chapter
001 8 10/27 Mon
Source Title
Page 001/001
---
---
Source Chapter
002
001
003
---
Chapters in Playlist
-----
---
---
001
002
Page 001/001
Copying (➡ 49) a playlist will create a title.
≥Editing playlists doesn’t modify the recorded data. Playlists are
not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much capacity.
[HDD] [RAM]
≥The maximum number of items on a disc
–Playlists:
99
–Chapters in playlists: Approximately 1000
(Depends on the state of recording.)
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
Page 001/001
≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.
Press [SUB MENU] to select “Create Chapter” and press
[ENTER] (➡ 45, Create Chapter).
7
Press [2, 1] to select the position to
insert the chapter and press [ENTER].
PLAYLISTS
Create
HDD
Creating playlists
001 8 10/27 Mon
Source Title
1
While stopped
2
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” and press [ENTER].
FUNCTIONS
Available Space: 79:36 SP
HDD
Playback
Program
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Flexible Recording
Delete
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
3
RQT8365
46
Schedule
VCR Plus+
DV Camcorder Rec.
Setup
HDD Management
Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [ENTER].
Page 001/001
---
---
Source Chapter
002
001
003
---
Chapters in Playlist
-----
---
---
001
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive containing
the recorded title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release disc or cartridge protection (➡ 56).
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while
copying.
ENTER
002
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
Press RETURN to exit.
≥Press [3] to select other source titles.
≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.
8
Press [RETURN].
All the selected scenes become the playlist.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
9:28 PM
Editing and playing playlists/chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
1
2
3
4
Playlist operations
After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)
Delete
Playlist§
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
playlist.
[HDD] [RAM]
Properties
01
--
Create
--
--
--
Copy
[HDD] [RAM]
--
Playlist
Name
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 44)
5
Press [SUB MENU], then press [3, 4]
to select the operation and press
[ENTER].
Change
Thumbnail
Playlist Name
Delete Playlist
Refer to “Playlist
operations”.
View Chapters
If you select “View Chapters”
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 7.
HDD
01 10/27 Mon 0:30
002
---
---
Move
Chapter
---
0:20.00
0:10.00
---
---
➡ 46, Creating playlists, Step 5–7
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
position to insert the chapter and
press [ENTER].
Chapter
View
screen
Chapter View
001
Multiple editing is possible.
Add
Chapter
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the chapter.
PLAYLISTS
➡ 45, Change Thumbnail
[HDD] [RAM]
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ left)
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and
source chapters.
Edit
6
➡ 59, Entering text
Chapter operations
Change Thumbnail
Properties
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [ENTER].
≥The copied playlist becomes the
newest one in the playlist view
screen.
[HDD] [RAM]
§
Copy
➡ 46, Creating playlists, Step 5–8
[HDD] [RAM]
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [ENTER].
Create
---
PLAYLISTS
Move Chapter
HDD
01 10/27 Mon 0:30
001
002
---
---
---
---
---
0:50.00
0:10.00
0:53.01
---
Date 6/20/2005 Wed
Length 0:30.05
[HDD] [RAM]
§
10/27 Mon 0:30
01
012
ENTER
Playlist View
screen
Playlist View
Properties
Dinosaur
Number
Chapters
Create
HDD
Playlist information (e.g., length and
date) is shown.
≥Press [ENTER] to exit the screen.
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
To start play ➡ Press [ENTER].
To edit ➡ Step 5.
PLAYLISTS
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [ENTER].
Once deleted, the playlists are lost
and cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.
Creating, editing and playing playlists
EH55English.book Page 47 Thursday, April 6, 2006
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 44)
7
Press [SUB MENU], then press [3, 4]
to select the operation and press
[ENTER].
Add Chapter
Move Chapter
Create Chapter
Refer to “Chapter operations”.
Combine Chapters
Delete Chapter
View Playlists
≥You can go back to the Playlist View.
§
Create
Chapter
➡ 45, Create Chapter
Combine
Chapters
➡ 45, Combine Chapters
Delete
Chapter§
➡ 45, Delete Chapter
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete
all the chapters in it.
Multiple editing is possible.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8365
47
EH55English.book Page 48 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Editing still pictures
Refer to the control reference on page 46.
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
≥You can edit pictures and albums.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB (➡ 6).
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on CD-R/CD-RW.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 56, Setting the protection—Disc
Protection).
1
2
4
Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [ENTER].
≥To edit the album
(e.g., [RAM])
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
(➡ 41)
Add Picture
Album Name
Create Album
Edit Album
Delete Album
Protection Setup
Copy to HDD
Cancel Protection
Title View
Select Root folder
[HDD] [RAM]
Press the “B” button to select “Picture”.
3
Start Slideshow
Slideshow settings
Editing an album:
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album to be
edited and press [SUB MENU].
≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,
press [SUB MENU] without selecting album.
[RAM] [SD]
≥This is only displayed when there are other
higher folders that can be viewed.
≥To switch to another higher folder ➡ 41
Editing titles/chapters and playing chapters ➡ 44, step 2
≥To edit still picture
(e.g., [SD])
Editing a still picture:
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album which
contains the still picture to edit and press [ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
pictures to edit and press [SUB MENU].
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Album and picture operation
(➡ below)
Delete Picture
Set Protection
Cancel Protection
Album and picture operation
(➡ below)
Print Order (DPOF)
Album View
You can go back to Album View.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 41)
Album and picture operation
After performing steps 1–4
Delete Picture§
Delete Album§
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Album Name
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Protection Setup§
Set Protection§
Cancel Protection§
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Print Order
(DPOF)§
[SD]
Add Picture
Create Album
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [ENTER].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥When deleting an album, files other than the still picture files inside the album will also be deleted. (This does
not apply to albums under the album concerned.)
You can give names to albums.
➡ 59, Entering text
≥Album names input using this unit may not be displayed on other equipment.
If set, this will protect the still picture or album from accidental deletion.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
The lock symbol appears when the still picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this unit to protect an album, the album may still be deleted by another unit.
You can select individual pictures for printing and specify the number of prints to be made.
Press [2, 1] to select number of print (0 to 9) and press [ENTER].
The DPOF mark appears (➡ right).
To cancel the print setting
Set the number of prints to “0”.
≥Print settings (DPOF) made using this unit may not be viewable on other equipment.
≥When this is set by this unit, any settings established by other units will be released.
≥Settings cannot be made for files not in accordance with DCF standards or if there is no remaining space on the card.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes” and press [ENTER].
4
3
2
Create Album
Step 1
Select an album
HDD
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album that contains the still picture
you want to add and press [ENTER].
[RAM] [SD] To switch to another higher folder ➡ 41
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
≥If “Select pictures to copy” is selected
Select the still picture you want to add and press [ENTER].
Previous
Page 02/02
Next
≥If “Copy all pictures” is selected
Previous
Next
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and press [ENTER].
≥If you want to continue copying, select “Yes” and go to step ➁.
5 Only for “Create Album”
Press [2, 1] to select the item and press [ENTER].
≥If “Yes” is selected
You can give names to albums. (➡ 59, Entering Text)
≥If “No” is selected
The recording date of the first picture in the album becomes the album name. (If there is no recording date
information, the date will appear as [--.--.----].)
Press [2] to select “Start copying” and press [ENTER].
You cannot copy if multiple albums are selected.
007
29/9/05 Total 27
My album1
---
ENTER
Copy to DVD-RAM
[HDD]
Copy to HDD
[RAM]
Multiple editing is possible.
§
RQT8365
48
[Note]
≥Scheduled recordings do not start when performing “Add Picture”, “Create Album”, “Copy to DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.
≥You cannot perform “Add Picture” or “Create Album” to a higher folder.
008
---
3/10/05 Total 12
My album2
---
---
EH55English.book Page 49 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
HDD ➝ DVD
Copy (➡ 50)
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult
settings.
Yes
DVD ➝ HDD
No
Features
Copy direction
High speed mode copy§1
Changing recording mode
Finalize§3
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures
from an SD card (➡ 52)
Copying playlists§4
Are chapters maintained?
Are thumbnails maintained?
Recording and Playing while Copying
§1
Yes
No
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Automatically finalized
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No§5
No§6
No
Copying using the copying list (➡ 50)
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists the
way you want.
Yes
Yes
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalized disc)
Yes
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high speed copy
with finalized discs.
[+RW] You cannot perform high speed copy
from +RW to HDD.
Yes§2
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Can be selected
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
Yes
No
[HDD] [RAM] only
Yes
Yes
Yes
No§5
Yes§7
No§6
No
Yes§8
Editing still pictures/Copying titles or playlists
Copying titles or playlists
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Enable High-Speed Mode” to
“On” before recording to the HDD. (The default setting is “On” ➡ 61).
However in the following cases, copying to the disc using the high speed mode does not work.
≥When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Enable High-Speed Mode” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with
high-speed copy.
≥Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode
≥Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.)
≥Titles that contain many deleted segments
≥MPEG2 moving picture titles copied to the HDD from an SD card
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in FR mode (recordings 5 hours or longer) and EP mode. ( “
” is displayed).
If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent
against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot select EP mode when you copy to +R DL disc.
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu Style” or “Playback will start with:”.
If you want to set play menu or the background color, select “Top Menu Style” or “Playback will start with:” in “DVD Management” before copying.
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.
§5 [RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW]: One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]: Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalizing after copying the disc.
§6 Thumbnails may return to the default position.
§7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD (However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalization or when copying MPEG2 moving
pictures from an SD card.)
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
–You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 8, Recording of digital broadcasting).
–Still pictures cannot be played.
§2
∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
4X Speed
5X Speed
16X Speed
HDD
DVD-R DL
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
(Dual Layer)
Rec
Rec
Required
Required
Required
Speed
Speed
Speed
mode time
time
time
time
1
XP
12 min
5x
6 min
10x
15 min
4x
SP
6 min
10x 2 min 25 s 25x 7 min 30 s 8x
1h
LP
3 min
20x 1 min 15 s 48x 3 min 45 s 16x
EP (6H)
2 min
30x
52 s
69x 2 min 30 s 24x
EP (8H)
1 min 30 s 40x
42 s
86x 1 min 53 s 32x
2.4X Speed
4X Speed
+R DL
+RW
(Double Layer)
Required
Required
Required
Required
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
time
time
time
time
15 min
4x
8 min 35 s 7x
25 min 2.4x
15 min
4x
7 min 30 s 8x
4 min 10 s 14x 12 min 30 s 4.8x 7 min 30 s 8x
3 min 45 s 16x 2 min 25 s 25x 6 min 15 s 7.2x 3 min 45 s 16x
2 min 30 s 24x
1 min 53 s 32x
4X Speed§1
DVD-RW
8X Speed§2
+R
≥The above rated value indicates the fastest time and speed required for copying one-hour title from HDD to each disc in the above list supporting
high speed copying.
§1 On this unit, the copying performance with a 6X Speed DVD-RW will be the same as the performance with a 4X Speed DVD-RW.
§2 On this unit, the copying performance with a 16X Speed +R will be the same as the performance with a 8X Speed +R .
[Note]
≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not perform the maximum recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of the disc, copying speed of this unit may vary.
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided)
and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
When not using high speed copy, titles are temporarily copied to the HDD
at normal speed and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL.
The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.
–When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When
copying to a new blank DVD-R DL and +R DL, if you fill a new
disc when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free
space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)
–When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles
to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 500 in total.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
Regarding copying of digital broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording”
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (➡ 76) compatible DVDRAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
≥Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.
≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (➡ 45).
≥You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording”
titles.
≥Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be registered
on the same copying list.
RQT8365
49
EH55English.book Page 50 Thursday, April 6, 2006
POWER
9:28 PM
TV
POWER
Copying titles or playlists
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
Press [2, 1] to select “Start copying”
and press [ENTER].
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numbered
buttons
SKIP
:, 9
PAUSE
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
DELETE
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
;
Copying starts.
VCR Plus
Plusi
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
∫
CH
1
SCHEDULE
TV GUIDE
ENTER
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
S
AUDIO
“A”
“B”
A
REC
DISPLAY
CREATE
CHAPTER
COPY Navigator
HDD
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
B
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
ENTER
STATUS
Preparation
≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (➡ 4–6).
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
Copy
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R
DL are automatically finalized (➡ 76). After finalizing, the
discs become play-only and you can also play them on other
DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalized discs.)
∫ Copying speed mode and recording mode
The copy speed set by the COPY Navigator is as follows:
[HDD] > [RAM] : High speed
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : ➡ below
“Enable High-Speed Mode” (➡ 61)
When source titles were recorded with “On”
selected
When source titles were recorded with “Off”
selected
When there are source titles recorded with
“On” selected and source titles recorded with
“Off” selected
Speed mode
Normal speed
(FR recording
mode)
If there is not enough remaining space on the destination disc to
copy in the above mode, the copying mode will change to FR.
While stopped
Rec. Length
0:52(SP)
0
Ch.
36
24
12
34
19
69
54
8
Day
Fri
Sat
Fri
Fri
Sat
Fri
Fri
Sat
3
S SUB MENU
1
Start
Title Name
1:30 PM
7:15 AM
8:00 PM
9:05 PM
4:10 PM
9:25 AM
1:30 PM
2:00 AM
50
4
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [ENTER].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copying Direction
Source
HDD
Destination
DVD
HDD > DVD
2 Mode
Video
High Speed
Select
Press [3, 4] to select the title you
want to copy and press [ENTER].
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press [;] to add
the check mark and press [ENTER] (➡ 51, Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ 51)
RQT8365
Page 01/01
Properties
Sort
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
Page 01/01
ENTER
Start
Title Name
1:30 PM
7:15 AM
8:00 PM
9:05 PM
4:10 PM
9:25 AM
1:30 PM
2:00 AM
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]
You can arrange titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.
(You cannot copy to finalized discs.)
Destination capacity : 4310MB
Total selected size :
0MB( 0%)
Date
11/18
11/19
11/26
11/26
11/27
12/2
12/2
12/3
Day
Fri
Sat
Fri
Fri
Sat
Fri
Fri
Sat
Copying using the copying list—
Advanced Copy
3
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
---
Destination capacity : 4310MB
Total selected size :
0MB( 0%)
Date
11/18
11/19
11/26
11/26
11/27
12/2
12/2
12/3
≥When copying titles in high speed mode to 5X high speed
recording compatible DVD-RAM or 8X high speed recording
compatible DVD-R or +R, the sound of the disc rotating becomes
louder than normal.
–If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Silent mode” in
“Rapidity of High-Speed copying” in the Setup menu (➡ 61).
≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and
then copy the contents of the list (➡ below).
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [ENTER].
Title
Ch.
36
24
12
34
19
69
54
8
[Note]
2
HDD
0
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
---
Properties:
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are shown.
Sort:
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [ENTER].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is canceled.
Press [FUNCTIONS].
COPY Navigator
Title
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [ENTER].
High speed
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] The source title recorded in FR mode (recordings 5 hours
or longer) or EP mode will be copied at normal speed (FR recording mode).
2
Rec. Length
0:52(SP)
Info
See also “Important notes for recording” (➡ 8).
1
∫ To stop copying ➡ 51
∫ COPY Navigator icons and functions ➡ 51
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
Navigator
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
[SUB MENU].
After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R and +R DL discs, they become playonly and you can no longer record or edit.
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ 51, step 7).
4
Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ 51, step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copying Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
6 Press [2] to confirm.
5
9:28 PM
∫ To stop copying
Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Content Type” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Video” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [ENTER].
6 Press [2] to confirm.
6
Register titles and playlists for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
Destination Capacity : 4343MB
Total list size :
0MB ( 0%)
1 Copying Direction
No.
HDD > DVD
Title Name
Size
New Entry (Total = 0)
High Speed
Press [RETURN].
3 Create List
∫ Recording and playing while copying
Page 01/01
Create a Copying List.
Start Copying
ENTER
S SUB MENU
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Entry” and press [ENTER].
3 Press the “A” button to select “Video” or press the
“B” button to select “Playlists”.
Create List
HDD
A Video
007
008
0:30(SP)
10 10/10 Fri
8 11/10 Sat
B Playlists
only items indicated with “
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] :
” or “
” can be registered.
only items indicated with “
” can be registered.
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER]
(➡ below, Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ below)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ right)
You can register a multiple number of titles and
playlists on the copying list by repeating steps 2–4.
≥You cannot start copying when the value of the “Total list
size” (➡ right) exceeds 100 %. (“Destination capacity” is
not sufficient.)
5 Press [2] to confirm.
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [ENTER].
≥When copying titles in high speed mode to 5X high speed
recording compatible DVD-RAM or 8X high speed recording
compatible DVD-R or +R, the sound of the disc rotating
becomes louder than normal.
–If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Silent mode” in
“Rapidity of High-Speed copying” in the Setup menu (➡ 61).
8
You can record and play using the HDD while high-speed copying.
(Only when high-speed copying without finalizing.)
≥Still pictures cannot be played.
Press [ENTER] to cancel the screen display.
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS].
[Note]
---
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles or playlists and
press [ENTER].
≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] :
7
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point canceled. However titles with “One time only
recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied at the
point canceled are copied to the disc. Titles that are canceled before
the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is canceled during the step while copying to
the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is canceled
during the step while copying to disc from the HDD, then only
titles completely copied at the point canceled are copied.
∫ To return to the previous screen
2 Mode
Video
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point canceled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVDRW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of
remaining writable disc space becomes less.
Copy
Cancel All
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
However, you cannot stop finalize after it has started.
Copying titles or playlists
EH55English.book Page 51 Thursday, April 6, 2006
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER] to start copying.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] only
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy and finalize” or “Copy only”
and press [ENTER] to start copying.
≥If “Copy and finalize” is selected, the disc will be finalized
after copying.
The disc becomes play only and can be played on other
DVD equipment, however you can no longer record or edit.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
≥When you switch between the “Video” and “Playlists” tab, the
check mark is canceled.
To play the disc on other DVD players:
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] Finalize the disc (➡ 58)
[+RW] Create DVD Top Menu (➡ 58)
≥Scheduled recordings executed while copying are recorded to
the HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high-speed copying without finalizing.)
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed
mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL or +RW.
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed
mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format). (However, titles and playlists cannot be
copied in high speed mode to +R, +R DL or +RW).
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 8, Recording of digital broadcasting)
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying.
(➡ 8, Recording of digital broadcasting)
Title or playlists contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
Data size of each registered item
Total selected size
Destination Capacity : 4343MB
Total list size :
0MB ( 0%)
Total list size:
Title Name
No.
Size
New Entry (Total = 0)
Data size recorded to the copy destination
≥When copying at normal speed, the total data size
will change according to the recording mode.
≥The total data size shown may be larger
Create a Copying List.
than the sum of the data sizes for each
registered item, because of data
management information being written to
the copying destination, etc.
Page 01/01
∫ To edit the copying list
Clear All
Select the item in step 6–4 (➡ left column)
1 Press [SUB MENU].
Add
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press [ENTER].
Remove
Clear All: Clear all items registered on the copying list.
Move
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add: Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the playlists or titles to be added and
press [ENTER].
Remove: Remove the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
You can also remove multiple items (➡ left, Multiple editing).
Move: Move selected items or change the order of items on the
copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [ENTER].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 50, right column)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be canceled in the following situations.
–When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
RQT8365
51
EH55English.book Page 52 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Copying titles or playlists
Refer to the control reference on page 50.
8
When the top menu is displayed
Copying a finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[ENTER].
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
You can copy the content of finalized DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL etc. to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that
portion of title is not recorded.
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on the market have been treated to
prevent illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
≥The following cannot be copied: DVD-Audio, Video CD, Audio
CD and so on.
Preparation
≥Insert the finalized disc (➡ 13).
After performing steps 1–5 (“Content Type” is automatically set to
“DVD-Video”) (➡ 50, Copying using the copying list—Advanced
Copy)
6
Set “Time Limit”.
≥If you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 7).
∫ Setting the unit to copy according to the set
time
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Limit” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Limit” and press [ENTER].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
≥Setting the copying time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Set time” and press [ENTER].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copying Direction
DVD > HDD
2
2 Mode
DVD-Video
3
Hour
00 Min.
XP
Set a few minutes longer.
Time Limit
Start Copying
Press ENTER to change the setting.
My favorite
01/02
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
Chapter 3
04
Chapter 4
05
06
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To stop copying
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
[Note]
≥The screen saver on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of
copy to the end.
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top menu does not
display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a finalized DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (➡ 50, Copying
using the copying list—Advanced Copy).
Copying MPEG2 moving pictures from
an SD card
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc,
can be recorded on HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card with
this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying MPEG2.
ENTER
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press
[3, 4] to set the recording time.
6 Press [ENTER].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
7
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER] to start
copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “First Title
on DVD” is selected from the “Playback will start with:” menu
when finalizing the disc (➡ 58).
§
MPEG2
HDD
VIDEO
High-speed copy
§
DVD-RAM
Conventionally recorded programs
The display below automatically appears when you insert a card
into the SD card slot while stopped.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy video (MPEG2)” and press
[ENTER]. Then go to step 7 on page 51.
SD Card Operations
SD Card inserted.
Select an action or press RETURN.
Go to Album View
Copy pictures
Copy video (MPEG2)
ENTER
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying
list—Advanced Copy” (➡ 50)
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as
shown below.
Copying Direction
Source: SD card
Mode
Content Type: Video
≥MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card are automatically
registered on the copy list.
≥If there are no MPEG2 moving pictures on an SD card, “Copy
video (MPEG2)” is not displayed.
RQT8365
52
EH55English.book Page 53 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Copying from a video cassette recorder
POWER
TV
2
3
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
CH
Recording starts.
DELETE
INPUT SELECT
;
PAUSE
∫
SCHEDULE
TV GUIDE
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FUNCTIONS
ENTER
SUB MENU
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
Almost all videos and DVD software on the market have
been treated to prevent illegal copying. Any software that
has been so treated cannot be recorded using this unit.
≥Using Flexible Recording (➡ 26), you can save the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.
DV camcorder recording (DV
Camcorder Rec.)
S
AUDIO
A
¥ REC
REC MODE
REC
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER
Info
B
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
e.g.:
Connecting other video equipment to the IN2 or DV input terminals
You can also connect to the IN1or IN3 input terminals on the rear.
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE
REC
DRIVE
SELECT
k1.3
1.3
CH
DV IN
S VIDEO VIDEO L/MONO-AUDIO-R
IN2
DV IN
S VIDEO
This unit
VIDEO
L/MONO - AUDIO - R
Yellow White Red
DV cable
(IEEE 1394,
4-pin)
or
S-Video
cable§
When you want to start recording
Press [¥ REC].
VCR Plus
Plusi
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
Start play on the other equipment.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Camcorder Rec.” function is used,
programs are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are
created at each break in the images and the playlists is created
automatically.
Preparation
1 Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the DV
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ left).
2 Turn on the main unit and press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
3 Turn on the DV equipment and pause play on the DV equipment
at the point you want recording to start.
After preparation is completed, the following screen appears
DV camcorder connection
Audio/Video
cable
DV connection detected.
Start recording?
Other video equipment
Record to HDD
Record to DVD
Copying titles or playlists/Copying from a video cassette recorder
POWER
Press [2, 1] to select “Record to HDD”
or “Record to DVD” as the copy
destination and press [ENTER].
You can now continue to step 4, below.
Cancel
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Connect to L/MONO on the IN2 input terminals at the front.
§ The S-VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
Select the type of audio recording from “Select Audio Channel for DV
Input” in the Setup menu (➡ 62).
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.
When copying 16:9 aspect titles:
≥[HDD] [RAM] If copying to HDD or DVD-RAM:
Set “Enable High-Speed Mode” to “Off” and you can copy in 16:9
aspect titles.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] If copying to DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R or +RW:
Regardless of the “Enable High-Speed Mode” settings, the video
will record in 4:3 aspect titles§.
§ You can change the screen size by adjusting the screen mode on
the television.
[Note]
If it becomes time for a scheduled recording to start while copying,
the recording will start and the copying will stop.
Manual recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Preparation
≥Connect a video cassette recorder to this unit’s input terminals.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD recording drive.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
≥To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “Linein NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (➡ 43).
1
2
3
4
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “DV Camcorder
Rec.” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Record” and
press [ENTER].
Recording starts.
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [ENTER] to finish DV
camcorder recording.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Notes on DV camcorder recording
While stopped
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder)
can be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
≥If you use video camcorders from other manufacturer’s these are
not guaranteed to work.
≥It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape in the DV equipment
will not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
If the DV camcorder recording function does not work properly, check the
connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (➡ left).
[Note]
When recording using this unit’s input terminals, only the sound
received at the time of recording will be recorded. As long as the
secondary audio that is recorded on the video cassette is not output
on the unit in play, it is not recorded.
1
ENTER
≥When the screen is not displayed, press [DRIVE SELECT] to
select HDD or DVD and then continue from step 1.
e.g., If you have connected to IN2 input terminals, select “IN2”.
RQT8365
53
EH55English.book Page 54 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Copying still pictures
POWER
TV
POWER
DRIVE SELECT
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture” and press [ENTER].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numbered
buttons
SKIP
:,9
;
6
CH
Register still pictures for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (➡ step 7).
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same
list.
VCR Plus
Plusi
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
Copy
PAUSE
STOP
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
Cancel All
1 Copying Direction
SCHEDULE
SD card > HDD
DIRECT NAVIGAT
OR
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
S
AUDIO
DISPLAY
CREATE
CHAPTER
Title Name
Size
New Entry (Total = 0)
Picture High Speed
3 Create List
TIONS
FU N C
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
No.
2 Mode
TV GUIDE
ENTER
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
Page 01/01
Start Copying
ENTER
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
Create a Copying List.
S SUB MENU
∫ To register individual still pictures
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Entry” and press
[ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a still picture and press
[ENTER].
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER] (➡ 55,
Multiple editing)
≥To show other pages (➡ 55)
≥To select the still pictures in another folder (➡ 55)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 55)
Info
A
B
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
REC REC MODE
CM SKIP
≥You can use SD Memory Cards
withSTATUS
capacities
from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 6).
≥Still pictures recorded on CD-R or CD-RW cannot be copied.
[SD]
While stopped, put the card in the SD slot, and the menu (➡ below)
is automatically displayed.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy pictures” and press [ENTER]. Then go
to step 4 on page 55, “Copying all the still pictures on a card–Copy
all Pictures”.
You can register a multiple number of still pictures on
the copying list by repeating steps 2–3.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
SD Card Operations
SD Card inserted.
Select an action or press RETURN.
Go to Album View
Copy pictures
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
Copy video (MPEG2)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press
[ENTER].
ENTER
Press [RETURN] to exit the screen.
Copying using the copying list
Copy
Cancel All
1
2
3
1 Copying Direction
SD card > HDD
While stopped
Cancel All
Source
SD card
Destination
HDD
You can register a multiple number of folders on the
copying list by repeating steps 4–5.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
SD card > HDD
Picture High Speed
3 Create List
0
≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]
several times (➡ step 7).
4
RQT8365
54
7
Set the recording mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(➡ step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Content Type” and press
[ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [ENTER].
≥For individual still pictures only
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.
Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (➡ step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copying Direction” and press
[1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [ENTER].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [ENTER].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
5
Title Name
Size
New Entry (Total = 0)
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New Entry” and press
[ENTER].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
≥To select a multiple number of items together, press
[;] to add the check mark and press [ENTER] (➡ 55,
Multiple editing).
≥To show other pages (➡ 55)
≥To switch to another higher folder (➡ 55)
≥To edit the copying list (➡ 55)
Copy
2 Mode
No.
2 Mode
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [ENTER].
1 Copying Direction
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
Folder
New folder
Make a new folder and dub to it?
8
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
- New folder
---
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER] to start copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
9:28 PM
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Copying all the still pictures on a card—
Copy all Pictures
[SD] > [HDD] or [RAM]
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.
≥A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the SD drive.
1
∫ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 6–3 (for a still picture) or 6–5
Clear All
(for a folder) (➡ 54, right column)
1 Press [SUB MENU].
Add
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
Remove
[ENTER].
Clear All:
Clear all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder to be added
and press [ENTER].
Remove:
Remove the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
You can also delete multiple items (➡ above, Multiple editing).
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 54, left column)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [ENTER].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].
≥The settings and lists may be canceled in the following situations.
–When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
–When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the card, open the tray, change the copying direction, etc.
2
3
Copying still pictures
EH55English.book Page 55 Thursday, April 6, 2006
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy all
Pictures” and press [ENTER].
Copy All Pictures (JPEG)
Copy from
Copy to
4
5
SD card
HDD
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and
press [2, 1] to select the drive.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”
and press [ENTER].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
∫ To select another folder
(➡ 76, Structure of folders displayed by this unit)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [ENTER].
If you want to switch to another higher folder (➡ below)
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [ENTER].
Create List
Select Pictures
SD CARD
Folder
0001
103__DVD
0002
0003
0004
001
002
003
004
---
\DCIM\100__DVD
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
103__DVD
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15:
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115:
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥Still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the same
list.
To switch to another higher folder
≥Only when selecting the source folder
(If there is a multiple number of higher folders recognizable on this
unit)
While the screen on the right appears
1 Press [SUB MENU] and press
[ENTER].
001
002
003
004
---
\DCIM\100__DVD
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
103__DVD
2 Press [2, 1] to select the
Select Root folder
higher folder and press
Select folder to access.
[ENTER].
\DCIM
You cannot register a folder
Press ENTER to confirm.
with a different higher folder
to the same list.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the desired folder and press [ENTER].
[Note]
≥When copying the still pictures on a folder by folder basis
(➡ 54) or card by card basis (➡ above, Copy all Pictures), files
other than the still picture files inside the folder will also be
copied. (This does not apply to the lower folders contained
inside the folders.)
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copying
destination folder, the new still pictures are recorded following
the existing still pictures.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 7), copying
will stop partway through.
≥When a name has not been input for the copy source folder, it is
possible that this folder’s name will not be the same on the copy
destination. It is recommended that you input a folder name
before copying (➡ 48, Album Name).
≥You cannot copy the information about the print number setting
(DPOF) or the picture rotation.
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the
copy list may not be the same at the copying destination.
RQT8365
55
EH55English.book Page 56 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
HDD, disc and card management
POWER
TV
Í
POWER
Í
DRIVE SELECT
Setting the protection—Disc Protection
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
[RAM]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
CH
PAUSE
SCHEDULE
ENTER
SUB MENU
RETURN
S
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER
Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
Protection” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
DVD
MANAGEMENT Titles: 11
DVD-RAM Used Time: 0 : 22
FUNCTIONS
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
TV GUIDE
A
5
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
REC
4
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
AUDIO
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
VCR Plusi
Plus
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
Free Time: 5:38 (EP)
Disc Name
Disc Protection
On
Delete All Titles
Info
B
Format Disc ( DVD )
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
ENTER
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB
(➡ 6).
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is writeprotected.
Cartridge-protection
Common procedures
While stopped
2
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” and press [ENTER].
FUNCTIONS
DVD-RAM
PROTECT
[SD]
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.
LOCK
1
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect position,
play automatically starts when inserted in the
unit.
Cartridge Protection Off
Disc Protection Off
Schedule
Playback
VCR Plus+
Program
Providing a name for a disc—Disc
Name
Advanced Copy
Playlists
Flexible Recording
Delete
Copy
Other Functions
ENTER
RETURN
DV Camcorder Rec.
Setup
DVD Management
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot provide a name for finalized discs.)
You can provide a name for each disc.
3
Press [3, 4] to select “HDD
Management”, “DVD Management” or
“Card Management” and press
[ENTER].
e.g., [RAM]
DVD
MANAGEMENT Titles: 11
DVD-RAM Used Time: 0 : 22
Delete All Titles
Format Disc ( DVD )
ENTER
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
56
Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [ENTER].
➡ 59, Entering text
Disc Name
RQT8365
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)
4
Free Time: 5:38 (EP)
Disc Protection
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ above).
Off
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD MANAGEMENT window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalized discs the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment.
My favorite
DVD
MANAGEMENT Titles: 11
DVD-RAM Used Time: 0 : 22
Disc Name
Free Time: 5:38 (EP)
My favorite
01/02
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
Chapter 3
04
Chapter 4
9:28 PM
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete
All Titles
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 56).
Deleting all the contents of a disc or
card—Format
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] [SD]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥Release protection (➡ 56).
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56)
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete All
Titles” and press [ENTER].
5
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
6
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
[Note]
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or
card even if you have set protection.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56)
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Format Hard
Drive”, “Format Disc ( DVD )” or
“Format memory card” and press
[ENTER].
5
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
6
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
A message appears when finished.
7
Press [ENTER].
[Note]
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Still picture data (JPEG, TIFF) or computer data cannot be deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
HDD, disc and card management
EH55English.book Page 57 Thursday, April 6, 2006
A message appears when formatting is finished.
[Note]
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while
formatting. This can render the disc or the card unusable.
7
Press [ENTER].
[Note]
≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed on the disc.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
To stop formatting [RAM]
Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc
must be reformatted if you do this.
RQT8365
57
EH55English.book Page 58 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
HDD, disc and card management
Refer to the control reference on page 56.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Selecting the background style—Top
Menu Style
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVDVideo top menu after finalizing.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56)
4
5
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu
Style” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [ENTER].
Top Menu Style
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display after finalizing
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Title Name
7
018
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first—Playback will start with:
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether or not to show the top menu after finalizing.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56)
5
Press [3, 4] to select “Playback will
start with:” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “DVD’s Top
Menu” or “First Title on DVD” and
press [ENTER].
DVD’s Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
First Title on DVD: The disc content is played without
displaying the top menu.
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment—Finalize
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Make selections from “Top Menu Style” and “Playback will start with:”
above before finalizing the disc.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56)
4
5
6
Press [3, 4] to select “Finalize” and
press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
A message appears when finalizing is finished.
[Note]
≥You cannot cancel finalizing.
≥Finalizing takes up to 15 minutes. (Finalizing may take up to
60 minutes with DVD-R DL and +R DL.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while
finalizing. This will render the disc unusable.
RQT8365
58
7
Press [ENTER].
When finalizing a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four
times).
After finalizing
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(➡ 57) although it becomes play-only after finalizing.
≥When copying in high-speed, chapters will be replicated.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8minute)§ chapters, if
–the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
–the titles were copied using any mode other than the
high-speed mode.
§ This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and
chapters during play.
[Note]
Chapters on a finalized disc do not appear as thumbnails in the
disc’s top menu.
9
≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (➡ 45,
Change Thumbnail)
4
[Note]
Before
finalizing
After
finalizing
Recording/Editing/Entering name
Yes
No
Play on other players
No
Yes
≥You cannot finalize discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥If you finalize discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu Style” may not be
displayed.
≥Discs finalized on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
≥Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.
http://www.panasonic.com
Creating Top Menu—Create DVD Top
Menu
[+RW]
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
You cannot use the Top menu for playing on this unit.
After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 56)
4
5
6
Press [3, 4] to select “Create DVD
Top Menu” and press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [ENTER].
Creating DVD Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating DVD Top Menu can take a few minutes.
7
Press [ENTER].
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create DVD Top
Menu”.
EH55English.book Page 59 Thursday, April 6, 2006
POWER
9:28 PM
TV
Entering text
POWER
2
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
Numbered
buttons
¢ CANCEL
SKIP
CH
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
VCR Plus
Plusi
≥To erase a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;]. (The selected characters are erased.)
DELETE
SLOW/SEARCH
:,9
∫
;
PAUSE
STOP
≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
e.g., entering the letter “R”
5 J K
1 Press [7] to move to the
7
7
7th row.
6 M N
7
2 Press [7] twice to
highlight “R”.
7 P Q
3 Press [ENTER].
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
SCHEDULE
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
TV GUIDE
ENTER
SUB MENU
CREATE
AUDIO
DISPLAY CHAPTER
A
8 T
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
RETURN
S
SUB MENU
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
character and press [ENTER].
≥To enter a space
Press [¢ CANCEL] and press [ENTER].
≥Save/recall phrases (➡ below)
Info
U
L
O
R
S
V
B
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[SD]
REC [+R]
REC MODE[+R]DL]
STATUS CM[+RW]
SKIP
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
The maximum number of characters:
[HDD] [RAM]
Characters
Title
64
Playlist
64
Album of still pictures
36
Disc ([RAM])
64
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Characters
Title
44
Disc
40
[SD]
Characters
Album of still pictures
36
3
HDD, disc and card management/Entering text
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
Press [∫] (Set).
“Now writing.” appears then the screen returns to the Title
view screen and so on.
To end partway
Press [RETURN].
Text is not saved.
∫ To save phrases
You can save frequently used phrases and recall them later.
Maximum number of saved phrases: 20
Maximum number of characters per phrase: 20
After entering the phrase (step1–2)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase Save” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [9] to select “Phrase Save”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Save” and press [ENTER].
≥Press [RETURN] to cancel.
∫ To recall a saved phrase
[Note]
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
1
Show Enter Name screen.
Title
Select “Title Name” in step 5 on page 44.
Playlist
Select “Playlist Name” in step 5 on page 47.
Disc
Select “Disc Name” in step 4 of “Providing a
name for a disc—Disc Name” on page 56.
Folder of still pictures
Select “Album Name” in step 4 on page 48, “To
edit the album”.
Name field: shows the text you have entered
;
Erase
Phrase Save
Phrase List
π
Set
∫ To erase saved phrases
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase List” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:] to select “Phrase List”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the phrase to be erased.
3 Press [SUB MENU] to show “Erase Phrase” and press
[ENTER].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Erase” and press [ENTER].
5 Press [RETURN].
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the TOP MENU
after finalization (➡ 58). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the TOP MENU can be previewed in “Top Menu
Preview (Finalized Disc)” window.
Title Name
Chapter 1_
Title Name
_
Top Menu Preview
(Finalized Disc)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase List” and press
[ENTER].
≥You can also press [:] to select “Phrase List”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the phrase to be recalled and
press [ENTER].
1 1
2
3
2 A
B
3 D
E
4 G
H
5 J
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
C
a
b
c
i j
F
d
e
f
/
l %
*
I
g
h
i
fl
$
l
O N @
1 1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
2 A
B
C
a
b
c
i j
3 D
E
F
d
e
f
/
*
l %
4 G
H
I
g
h
i
fl
$
4
&
&
K
L
j
6 M N
O
m
k
n
o
[
]
_
7 P
8 T
Q
R
p
q
r
s
(
U
V
t
u
v
{
}
)
-
9 W X
0 . ,
Y
Z
w
x
?
!
"
'
y
:
z
;
\
`
|
^
S
Top Menu Preview
(Finalized Disc)
Chapter 1
Space
ENTER
RQT8365
59
EH55English.book Page 60 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Changing the unit’s settings
2
DVD
Í DVD POWER
POWER
TV
Í
POWER
3
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
Tabs
PAGE
Numbered
buttons
¢ CANCEL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
Setup
PAUSE
Signal Source (RF IN)
DELETE
Channel
Setup
4
5
SCHEDULE
TV GUIDE
ENTER
SUB MENU
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
FUNCTIONS
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
RETURN
S
AUDIO
A
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER
Info
B
REC
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
6
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
Common procedures
1
CableTV
Set Channels Automatically
Press [3, 4] to select the tab and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select the option and
press [ENTER].
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
Options
TV Guide Settings
VCR Plus
Plusi
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
Menus
CH
[Note]
There may be differences in operation methods. If this happens,
follow the on-screen instructions for the operation.
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Summary of settings
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Tabs
Channel
Menus
TV Guide Settings
Set the TV Guide On ScreenTM system.
Signal Source (RF IN)§3
Select to suit the type of antenna you are using.
≥Antenna
Set Channels Automatically§1 §2 (➡ 64)
j
Preset Channel Captions§2 §3 (➡ 65)
j
Manual Channel Captions
Setup
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
§2 §3
(➡ 65)
≥CableTV
j
VCR Plusr Ch. Setting§2 §4 (➡ 65)
j
Off Timer
Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used.
≥2 Hours
Remote Control Code (➡ 23)
≥Set Code 1
≥6 Hours
≥Off
≥Set Code 2
≥Set Code 3
§1
Clock Settings
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Set Clock Automatically§1 §2 (➡ 64)
Set Clock Manually§1 (➡ 22)
Adjust Time Zone§1 §5 (➡ 64)
§1
§2
RQT8365
60
§3
§4
§5
≥j1
DivX Registration
Displays the unit’s registration code. You need this registration
code to purchase and play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
content.
j
Restore Default Settings
This returns all values in the Setup menus, except for the clock,
channel settings, ratings level, and on-screen language, to the
default settings.
≥Yes
≥0
≥i1
≥No
You need to set these menus only when you do not use TV Guide On ScreenTM system. These menus turn grey and become un-selectable
after this unit downloads the program listings.
You can set these menus only if you connect an antenna or cable without a cable box.
These menus turn grey and become un-selectable after TV Guide Setup is completed.
This menu turns grey and becomes un-selectable if you connect to DISH Network.
You can set the menu only after “Set Channels Automatically” is completed.
Tabs
Disc
9:28 PM
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Settings for Playback
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Ratings
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
≥8 No Limit:
≥1 to 7:
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit
password with the numbered buttons when the
password screen is shown.
≥Do not forget your password.
≥0 Lock All:
Play DVD-Audio in Video Mode
Select “Video Mode (Video On)” to play DVD-Video
content on some DVD-Audio.
≥Video Mode (Video On):The setting returns to “Audio Mode
(Video Off)” when you change the
disc or turn the unit off.
≥Audio Mode (Video Off)
Audio
Language
≥French
≥Spanish
≥English
≥Original: The original language of each disc will be selected.
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
Subtitle
Language
Menu
Language
Choose the language for audio, subtitle
and disc menus. [DVD-V]
≥Some discs start in a certain
language despite any changes you
make here.
≥Enter a code (➡ 77) with the
numbered buttons when you select
“Other ¢¢¢¢”.
When the selected language is not
available on the disc, the default
language is played. There are discs
where you can only switch the
language from the menu screen
(➡ 37).
All DVD-Video can be played.
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
≥Unlock Recorder
≥Change Level
≥Change Password
≥Temporary Unlock
Changing the unit’s settings
EH55English.book Page 61 Thursday, April 6, 2006
≥Automatic:
If the language selected for “Audio Language” is not available,
subtitles of that language will automatically appear if available
on that disc.
≥English
≥French
≥Spanish ≥Other ¢¢¢¢
≥English
≥French
≥Spanish
≥Other ¢¢¢¢
Settings for Recording
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
Recording Time in EP Mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in
EP mode (➡ 25, Recording modes and approximate
recording times).
≥EP-Extended Play (6H):You can record for 6 hours on an
unused 4.7 GB disc.
≥EP-Extended Play (8H):You can record for 8 hours on an
unused 4.7 GB disc.
The sound quality is better when using “EP-Extended Play (6H)”
than when using “EP-Extended Play (8H)”.
Enable High-Speed Mode
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL
and +RW using high speed mode. However, screen
size, etc. is restricted (➡ right).
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed
copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording
a program.
≥On:
You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press [2, 1]
to select “Yes”.
≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded titles.
–Pictures are saved in 4:3.
–Select the type of audio in advance from “Multichannel TV Sound ( MTS )” (➡ 62).
–You are no longer able to switch the audio when
watching a program on an input channel on the TV
connected to this unit (e.g., video 1, etc).
≥Off
Rapidity of High-Speed copying
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using
high-speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R,
+R 8X or +RW 4X discs).
Video
≥Top speed mode
≥Silent mode
When copying, the operation sound will become quieter.
However, the time required for copying will become longer.
Still Mode ( paused video )
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (➡ 76,
Frames and fields).
≥Automatic
≥Field: Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.
(The picture is coarser.)
≥Frame: Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture is
clearer and finer.)
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
≥On:
≥Off:
The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This
does not work when there are several audio types
included on the playlist and when using Quick View.
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may
change slightly.
The points where chapters in playlists change are
played accurately, but the picture may freeze for a
moment.
Black Level Control
Select normal, lighter or darker for adjusting the black level control to the desired setting for picture enhancement.
Input Level
Adjusts the black level of the input signal.
≥Lighter
≥Darker
Output Level (Composite/SVideo)
Adjusts the black level of the output signal from the
VIDEO OUT and S VIDEO OUT terminal.
≥Lighter
≥Darker
Output Level (Component)
Adjusts the black level of the output signal from the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y/PB/PR) terminals.
≥Lighter
≥Normal
≥Darker
RQT8365
61
EH55English.book Page 62 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Changing the unit’s settings
Tabs
Audio
Menus
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Dynamic Range Compression [DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
≥On
≥Off
Multi-channel TV Sound ( MTS )
Select whether to record the main or secondary (SAP) audio
type when:
–Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.
–When “Enable High-Speed Mode” is set to “On”.
–Recording or copying sound in LPCM. (➡ below, Audio for
XP Recording).
≥Secondary Audio Program (SAP)
≥Main
You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select on the video cassette recorder, cable box
or satellite receiver.
Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➡ 18).
≥Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96
kHz or 88.2 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the
settings across if the signals have a sampling frequency
of over 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy
protection.
≥On:
Dolby Digital Select how to output the signal. If
“Bitstream” is selected, the connected
equipment decodes the signal.
If “PCM” is selected, this unit decodes the
signal and output it as 2 channel.
DTS
≥Bitstream: When connecting to equipment displaying the
Dolby Digital logo.
≥PCM:
When connecting to equipment not displaying the
Dolby Digital logo.
[Note]
Not making the proper settings may result
in noise, or some trouble for digital
recording.
Display
TV
Screen
≥Off:
Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment cannot process
signals with sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2
kHz.)
Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment can process signals
with sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
≥Bitstream: When connecting to equipment displaying the DTS
logo.
≥PCM:
When connecting to equipment not displaying the
DTS logo.
Audio for XP Recording
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP
mode.
≥Dolby Digital (➡ 76)
≥LPCM (➡ 76)
–The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than
that of normal XP mode recordings.
–The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you
selected LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
–When recording a MTS broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Multi-channel TV Sound ( MTS )” (➡ above).
Select Audio Channel for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s
DV terminal (➡ 53).
≥Stereo 1: Records audio (L1, R1).
≥Stereo 2: Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
≥Mix:
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
When recording a MTS broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Multi-channel TV Sound ( MTS )” (➡ above).
Status Messages
Choose whether to show status messages automatically.
≥Automatic
On-screen Language
Choose the language for these menus and on-screen
messages.
≥Español ≥Français
≥English
–Only English is displayed in the TV Guide On ScreenTM
system regardless of the settings. Other languages cannot
be displayed.
Blue Background
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the blue
background when reception is weak.
≥On
FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
≥Dim
≥Bright
≥Automatic:
The display turns dark during play, and reappears
momentarily if a button is pressed. When the unit is turned off
all displays disappear. While using this mode the standby
power consumption can be reduced.
TV Type (➡ 23)
Set to match the type of television connected.
4:3 TV
≥Aspect 4:3 & 480i
≥Off
≥Off
≥Aspect 4:3 & 480p
16:9 Aspect ( Widescreen TV )
≥Aspect 16:9 & 480i
≥Aspect 16:9 & 480p
RQT8365
62
Tabs
9:28 PM
Menus
TV
Screen
Options (Underlined items are the factory presets.)
Functions of HDMI
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.
≥On:
≥Off:
HDMI Video Output
HDMI Resolution
You can only select items compatible with the
connected equipment. This setting normally
does not need to be changed. However if you
are concerned about output picture quality, it
may be improved by changing the setting.
Still pictures play at a resolution equivalent to
480p regardless of the settings.
When video is output from COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal.
≥Auto:
Automatically selects the output resolution best suited to the
connected television (1080i, 720p or 480p).
≥480p
≥720p
≥1080i
HDMI Output Display Aspect
Settings used when 4:3 aspect video is output
on the television as 16:9 aspect.
(Only effective when 720p or 1080i is selected
in “HDMI Resolution”)
≥Full:
≥Normal:
HDMI RGB Output Range
Effective when connected to a device that only
supports RGB output.
≥Standard:
≥Enhanced: When the black and white images are not distinct.
HDMI Audio Output
≥On:
≥Off:
HDMI Connection Speakers Setting
You can set the unit to output the best possible
sound for your speakers.
Multi Channel Setting (➡ below)
Displayed when “Multi Channel” is selected
in “HDMI Connection Speakers Setting”
Video output is enlarged to match the 16:9 screen size.
Video is output as 4:3 aspect. Side panels (black bars on the
left and right) will appear on the screen.
When the TV is connected to this unit with an HDMI cable, and
you are connected to an amplifier that does not support HDMI
with an optical digital audio cable.
≥Auto:
When using the speaker settings of the connected equipment.
≥Multi Channel: When using three or more speakers with equipment that
cannot set the speaker settings.
≥2 Channel:
When using two speakers.
You can adjust the settings for speaker size, presence and audio-delay.
≥On:
Ctrl with HDMI
Changing the unit’s settings
EH55English.book Page 63 Thursday, April 6, 2006
When “On” is selected, you can operate other “Ctrl with HDMI”
compatible devices.
≥Off:
4:3 TV Settings for DVD-Video
Select how a DVD-Video widescreen picture is
shown on a 4:3 standard aspect television.
≥Pan and Scan (Stretch to fit):
Video recorded for a widescreen is played as Pan & Scan (unless
prohibited by the producer of the disc).
≥Letterbox (Shrink to fit):
Video recorded for a widescreen is played in the letterbox style.
4:3 TV Settings for DVD-RAM
Select how a DVD-RAM widescreen picture is shown
on a 4:3 standard aspect television.
≥4:3 Aspect:
Titles played as recorded.
≥Pan and Scan (Stretch to fit): Video recorded for a widescreen is played as
Pan & Scan.
≥Letterbox (Shrink to fit):
Video recorded for a widescreen is played
in the letterbox style.
Changing the speaker setting to suit your speakers
When connecting with an HDMI cable to an amplifier, use the following settings on this unit if you cannot set the speaker delay effect on the amplifier.
Center
A Front (L)
B
A
L
ms
0.0
C
Complete
Complete
A Front (R)
Delay time (B)
R
SW
A
Subwoofer
ms
0.0
LS
A
B
(LS) Surround
If the subwoofer is set to “No”, the front speakers will automatically
be set to “Large”. (In this case, we recommend connecting a speaker
that can reproduce bass below 100 Hz.)
RS
A
(Effective when playing multi-channel audio)
If either distance C or E is less than D, find the difference in the
relevant table and change to the recommended setting.
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the delay time box (B) and press
[ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the setting and press [ENTER].
(RS)
Speaker presence and size (A)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the speaker icon (A) and press
[ENTER].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the setting and press [ENTER].
Icon examples:
Surround speaker (LS)
LS
LS
Large
Small
No
≥Large: Select when the
speaker supports low-frequency (under 100 Hz)
reproduction.
≥Small: Select when the speaker does not support low-frequency
reproduction.
: Recommended
placement
L
R
C
C D
E
LS
RS
SW
C Center speaker
Difference
Approx. 34 cm (11⁄10 feet)
Approx. 68 cm (21⁄5 feet)
Approx. 102 cm (33⁄10 feet)
Approx. 136 cm (42⁄5 feet)
Approx. 170 cm (51⁄2 feet)
E Surround speakers
Difference
Approx. 170 cm (51⁄2 feet)
Approx. 340 cm (11 feet)
Approx. 510 cm (161⁄2 feet)
Setting
1.0 ms
2.0 ms
3.0 ms
4.0 ms
5.0 ms
Setting
5.0 ms
10.0 ms
15.0 ms
RQT8365
63
EH55English.book Page 64 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Channel/Clock settings when TV Guide On ScreenTM system is not used
Refer to the control reference on page 60.
Preparation:
If the program listings have already been downloaded, return the unit to the factory preset condition using the steps indicated below.
When the unit is on and stopped
1 Press and hold [X CH] and [W CH] on the main unit for about five
seconds.
The unit turns off.
2 Press [POWER Í/I] to turn the unit on.
3 After the language and TV aspect is set up, press [RETURN] and
exit the TV Guide On ScreenTM system setup screen.
X CH W
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE
REC
DRIVE
SELECT
CH
k1.3
1.3
S VIDEO VIDEO L/MONO-AUDIO-R
DV IN
IN2
POWER Í/ l
[Note]
You can record only manually after you set the unit with “Set Channels Automatically”.
Auto channel/clock settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
≥The unit configures channels according to the Signal Source
(RF IN) settings as follows.
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Channel” and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Set Channels
Automatically” and press [ENTER].
Press [ENTER].
Auto Channel Setting starts. This takes a few minutes.
The unit then proceeds with Auto Clock Setting. The time is
displayed when finished.
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Set Clock Automatically
Auto Clock Setting is complete.
4/4/2005 12:15 AM
DST.............. On
Time Zone..... CST
≥DST, Daylight Saving Time, shows the summertime setting.
Regarding DST (Daylight Saving Time) ➡ 22
≥TIME ZONE shows the time difference from Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT).
EST (Eastern Standard Time) l GMT j5
CST (Central Standard Time) l GMT j6
MST (Mountain Standard Time) l GMT j7
PST (Pacific Standard Time)
l GMT j8
AST (Alaska Standard Time) l GMT j9
HST (Hawaii Standard Time) l GMT j10
For other areas: xx hr
≥If the Auto Clock Setting does not start automatically, select
“Clock Settings” from the “Setup” tab and then select “Set
Clock Automatically”.
≥If the time was not set correctly, use “Set Clock Manually”
(➡ 22) or adjust time zone.
7
Signal Source
(RF IN)
Antenna
CableTV
Band
Channel
VHF
2–13
UHF
14–69
VHF
2–13
CATV LOW BAND
95–99
CATV MID/SUPER BAND
14–36
CATV HYPER BAND
37–65
ULTRA BAND
SPECIAL CATV CHANNEL
66–94
100–125
1
Adjust Time Zone
Adjust the time zone (j1 or i1) if it was not set correctly with auto
clock setting.
You cannot change this setting if you set the clock manually.
1
2
3
4
5
6
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Clock
Settings” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Adjust Time
Zone” and press [ENTER].
Setup
Adjust Time Zone
j1
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Press [ENTER].
7
0
i1
Press [3, 4] to select “s1” or “r1”
and press [ENTER].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
To cancel partway while Auto Channel/Clock Setting is taking place
Press [RETURN].
RQT8365
64
To set so the TV Guide On ScreenTM system is not displayed automatically when you turn the unit on
When the power is turned on and the Start setup screen is displayed, press [3, 4] to select “Don’t remind me again” and press [ENTER].
9:28 PM
Manual Channel Captions
Channel captions
You can use the preset captions, or manually enter new ones
yourself.
The captions you enter are displayed when the channel is displayed
and in the Direct Navigator screen.
1
2
3
5
Press [3, 4] to select “Manual
Channel Captions” and press
[ENTER].
6
Press [3, 4] to select the channel
and press [1].
While stopped
Press [FUNCTIONS].
Press [3, 4] to select “Other
Functions” and press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [ENTER].
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
≥Channels are only displayed if they contain a station and if
preset captions have not been added.
7
Press [3, 4] to select the first
character and press [1].
≥You can choose from the following characters:
A–Z, 0–9, -, &, !, /, (space)
≥To delete the caption, press [¢ CANCEL].
≥Repeat this step to enter the other characters.
TV Guide Settings
Signal Source (RF IN)
4
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ left)
CableTV
Set Channels Automatically
Channel Captions
Preset Channel Captions
Manual Channel Captions
VCR Plusr Ch. Setting
Manual Channel Captions
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
Press [3, 4] to select “Channel” and
press [1].
Channel Number
Caption
6
8
-------
10
AAAA
12
23
-------
Channel/Clock settings when TV Guide On ScreenTM system is not used
EH55English.book Page 65 Thursday, April 6, 2006
ENTER
Preset Channel Captions
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ above)
5
Press [3, 4] to select “Preset
Channel Captions” and press
[ENTER].
Preset Channel Captions
Setup
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
6
Caption
Channel Number
GLOB
-
ABC
-
PBS
CBS
-
ENTER
Press [3, 4] to select the caption and
press [1].
8
Repeat steps 6–8 to enter other channels.
9
Press [3, 4] to select the channel
corresponding to the caption and
press [2].
VCR Plusr Channel Setting
After performing steps 1–4 (➡ left)
5
8
Press [ENTER].
Press [3, 4] to select “VCR Plusr
Ch. Setting” and press [ENTER].
VCR PlusiCh. Settings
Setup Guide Channel Cable Channel
Channel
Setup
Disc
Video
Audio
Display
TV Screen
6
≥Channels are only displayed if they contain a station and if
captions have not been added manually.
≥To delete the channel number, press [¢ CANCEL].
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter other channels.
Press [ENTER].
Set these guide channels so you can use the VCR Plusi
programming number for scheduled recording. Before setting up,
refer to a TV magazine for lists containing information on channels,
station names, and guide channels.
You can choose from the following captions.
ABC, PBS, CBS, CNN, FOX, ESPN, NBC, HBO, A&E, AMC,
FAM, MAX, MTV, SHOW, TBS, USA, TNT, CBC, UPN, CTV,
WB, TSN, DSC, GLOB
≥When selecting the caption, press and hold [3, 4] to scroll
up and down the screen.
7
Press [2, 1] to return to the “Channel
Number” column.
125
---
1
---
2
3
-----
ENTER
Press [3, 4] to select the guide
channel you want to set and press [1].
When selecting the guide channel, press and hold [3, 4] to
scroll the screen up and down.
7
Press [3, 4] to select the channel
corresponding to the guide channel
and press [2].
To delete a number, press [¢ CANCEL].
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter other channels.
8
Press [ENTER].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [RETURN] several times.
RQT8365
65
EH55English.book Page 66 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.
Set up
Page
Do I need to connect Audio/video
cables from this unit to the TV?
≥To enjoy vision and sounds from this unit to the TV, always use AV cables for
connection. If your television does not have AUDIO/VIDEO terminals, an RF modulator
is necessary. Consult your local dealer for more information.
14–18
What equipment is necessary to play
multi channel surround sound?
≥You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You
must connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with
a built-in (Dolby Digital or DTS) decoder.
≥An amplifier supporting CPPM and the HDMI standard (ver. 1.1 or later) must be
connected to this unit to play multi-channel audio on a DVD-Audio.
18, 19
—
Are the headphones and speakers
directly connected to the unit?
≥You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier, etc.
18
Is my television progressive output
compatible?
≥All Panasonic televisions that have 480p input terminals are compatible. Consult the
manufacturer if you have another brand of television.
—
The television has S VIDEO IN
terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO IN
terminals and HDMI IN terminal.
Which should I connect with?
≥The output of picture quality becomes finer in the following order:
–VIDEO IN terminal; S VIDEO IN terminal; COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals; HDMI
IN terminal.
However, it will take longer for the picture output to startup when this unit is connected
with the HDMI IN terminal.
—
≥You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalizing the disc on
this unit. It is not necessary to finalize +RW. However, depending on the condition of the
recording, the quality of the disc and capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be
possible. To easily use discs on other players, please use “Create DVD Top Menu” in the
DVD Management.
≥If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW use compatible equipment.
58
Disc
Can I play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVDRW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL
and +RW recorded with this unit with
other equipment?
—
Can I play DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
and Video CDs bought in another
country?
≥You can play them if the video standard is NTSC.
≥However, you cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not include “1” or
“ALL”. Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
Can a DVD-Video that does not have
a region number be played?
≥The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot
play discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not
conform to a standard.
—
Please tell me about disc
compatibility with this unit.
≥This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW and plays
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). You cannot directly record to DVD-R DL, and
+R DL discs with this unit, you must first record to the HDD. And then copy from the
HDD to disc.
≥This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.
4–6
Please tell me about CD-R and CDRW compatibility with this unit.
≥This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following
standards: CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, DivX and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF). Close the
session after recording.
≥You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.
—
Cover
—
7
—
Recording
Can I record from a commercially
purchased video cassette or DVD?
≥Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore,
recording is usually not possible.
—
Can I record digital audio signals
using this unit?
≥You cannot record digital signals. The digital audio terminals on this unit are for output
only. (The audio recorded from a digital video camcorder using the DV camcorder
recording function, for example, is recorded digitally.)
—
Can a digital audio signal from this
unit be recorded to other
equipment?
≥You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio
Output” settings to the following from the Setup menu.
–PCM Down Conversion
On
–Dolby Digital
PCM
–DTS
PCM
However, only
–As long as digital recording from the disc is permitted.
–As long as the recording equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48
kHz.
≥You cannot record MP3 signals.
62
≥With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can, and the audio recorded also changes. Just press
[AUDIO].
≥With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before
recording with “Multi-channel TV Sound ( MTS )” in the Setup menu.
27
≥Yes, you can.
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies. Refer to the table
(Approximate copying times).
49
Can I switch to SAP during
recording?
Can I high-speed copy to a disc?
RQT8365
66
—
62
9:28 PM
TV Guide On ScreenTM system
Page
Does the TV Guide On ScreenTM
system work with analog and digital
cable boxes/satellite receivers?
≥Yes. The TV Guide On ScreenTM system works with both analog and digital cable boxes.
≥If you are using a satellite service other than DirecTV, you cannot use the TV Guide On
ScreenTM system.
—
—
I have relocated, changed my
television reception system or cable
box etc. How should I redo the TV
Guide On ScreenTM system setup?
≥Select “Change system settings” in “SETUP” in the menu of the TV Guide On ScreenTM
system. If you select “No, repeat setup process”, you can then access the TV Guide On
ScreenTM system setup screen. You can also access the setup screen from “TV Guide
Settings” in the Setup menu.
34, 60
Please tell me about the
downloading of program listings
data.
≥Channel line-up data is transmitted continuously, 24 hours a day–7 days a week.
≥Program listings information that contains details about each program is usually
transmitted four times a day, and the cycles last approximately 3 hours. The TV Guide
On ScreenTM system only requires one transmission a day to maintain up-to-date
program listings. Because the unit must be turned off in order to receive new
information, multiple transmissions are conveniently scheduled early to mid-morning
and during the early afternoon hours.
—
—
Why doesn’t my favorite program
have more information in the
information window or expanded
information window?
≥The hardware that makes TV Guide On ScreenTM system possible is a computer chip
that has limited storage space. Factors used in determining which programs display
detailed program information are the number of channels turned “ON” in the CHANNEL
EDITOR screen and the availability of the descriptions.
Setting channels that cannot be received to “OFF” in the CHANNEL EDITOR screen
may increase the amount of information displayed.
34
Can I record one channel while
watching another?
If you connect with an antenna or “cable-ready”.
≥Yes. Change the television’s input mode to “TV”.
If you connect with a cable box or a satellite receiver
≥No. The user cannot watch one program and record another.
Frequently asked questions/Messages
EH55English.book Page 67 Thursday, April 6, 2006
—
—
If I have a power failure, will I need to
reset the scheduled recording of
programs I have already set?
≥In most cases the scheduled recording of programs will be saved. However, if an
extended power failure occurs, it is strongly recommended that you verify the scheduled
recording of programs that you had previously set. Press [SCHEDULE] to display the
SCHEDULE screen.
30
I do not want to use TV Guide On
ScreenTM system.
≥Set the unit with “Set Channels Automatically” in the Setup menu. Note that you can set
scheduled recording only manually after you set the unit with “Set Channels
Automatically”.
64
Messages
Messages including the following passages are displayed on screen.
On the television
Page
—
Authorization Error.
This title is not authorized to
play.
≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different registration
code. You cannot play the content on this unit.
Cannot finish recording
completely.
≥The program was copy-protected.
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of times you can record the program is exceeded.
Cannot play.
≥You inserted an incompatible disc (Discs recorded in PAL video, etc.).
—
Cannot record on the disc.
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched.
10
Cannot display on this unit.
≥You tried to play a non-compatible image.
≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.
7
10
Copyrighted material. Audio
will not be output from HDMI.
≥Should you connect equipment that does not support CPPM the audio from the CPPM
copy protected DVD-Audio cannot be output from HDMI AV OUT terminal. Connect the
audio cable of the Audio/Video cable (Red, White) or optical digital cable to the
corresponding terminals.
14–16
18
Cannot record. Disc is full.
≥[HDD] [RAM] [SD] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL,+R, +R DL there is no
increase in disc space. Available disc space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]
≥Use a new disc.
43, 45, 57
Cannot record. The number of
titles has exceeded the
maximum limit.
No disc
≥The disc may be upside down.
—
No folders.
≥There is no compatible folder in this unit.
76
No SD Card
No valid SD card.
≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.
10
There is not enough free space
on the copying destination.
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.
—
—
—
Unable to format.
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination
Capacity” is not exceeded.
—
6
43, 45, 48,
57
51, 55
Continued on next page
RQT8365
67
EH55English.book Page 68 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Messages
On the television (Continued)
This is a non-recordable disc.
This disc is not formatted
properly.
Insufficient Hard Drive space.
Four hours (SP) of free hard
drive space is needed in order
to start copying to DVD-R/+R
DL (D.Layer) disc.
Too many titles on the Hard
Drive. To allow titles to be
copied to a DVD-R/+R DL
(D.Layer) disc, please delete
unnecessary titles.
≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM, +RW or unfinalized
DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +R.
≥You cannot directly record to DVD-R DL, and +R DL discs with this unit. You must first
record to the HDD, and then copy from the HDD to disc.
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD or
when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are
greater than 500.
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.
Page
4–6
—
57
49
Rental Expired.
≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)
—
$
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
—
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was
HARD ERR§
purchased.
No AUDIO§
≥When connecting to CPPM incompatible equipment with an HDMI cable, CPPM copy proctected
DVD-Audio cannot output audio through the HDMI AV OUT terminal. Connect the audio cable of
the Audio/Video cable (Red, White) or optical digital cable to the corresponding terminals.
No READ
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
≥You have used a DVD lens cleaner and it has finished. Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit to eject the disc.
10
10
PLEASE WAIT§
≥Displayed when the unit is started. This is not a malfunction.
≥The unit is carrying out its recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while “PLEASE
WAIT” is displayed.
—
—
SET 
(“∑” stands for a number.)
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the
remote control.
Press and hold [ENTER] and the indicated number button at the
same time for more than 2 seconds.
23
SLEEP
≥In order to extend HDD life, the HDD is in SLEEP mode.
9
SP 35:50
LP 151h
“SP”, “LP” and the numbers are
examples.
≥Available space on the HDD or disc.
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the
example “LP 151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h”
means “151 hours”.
24
UNFORMAT§
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVDRW (DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it. However all the recorded contents on a disc are deleted.
—
UNSUPPORT§
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.
F74
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.
Consult your local dealer for more information.
—
F75
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.
Consult your local dealer for more information.
—
U59
≥The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the
message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan
on the rear of the unit.
—
U61
≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording,
playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
—
U71
≥The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
—
U72
U73
≥The HDMI connection acts unusually.
–The connected equipment is not HDMI compatible.
–Please use HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
–The HDMI cable is damaged.
—
U88
≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc
while playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.
69
U99
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [POWER Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to
standby. Now press [POWER Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
—
≥There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the
unit’s condition.)
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear,
do the following.
1. Disconnect the plug from the AC outlet, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [POWER Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite doing the above, request service from
the dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.
§ The messages are alternately displayed.
—
Hor F
RQT8365
68
—
14–16
18
4–6
69–74
EH55English.book Page 69 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, refer to the “Customer Services Directory” on page 78 if you reside in the U.S.A., or refer to the “Product information” on
page 77 if you reside in Canada.
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting
breaks.
≥A sound is heard when the HDD goes into SLEEP mode, or
operations are slow to respond in SLEEP mode.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a
Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.
(Press and hold [POWER Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)
≥When the HDD has been automatically placed in the SLEEP mode
(➡ 9), or the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
To reset this unit
Page
To return the channel settings
and clock to the factory preset
(No setting)
≥Press and hold [CH W] and [X CH] on the main unit for about 5 seconds.
(Current channel line-up and program listings are cleared.)
—
To return all the settings other
than the main ones to the
factory preset
≥Select “Yes” in “Restore Default Settings” in the Setup menu.
This returns all values in the Setup menus, except for the clock, channel settings, ratings
level, and on-screen language, to the default settings.
60
To reset the ratings level
settings
≥While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive then press and
hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY/a1.3) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
—
To restore the unit if it freezes
due to one of the safety
devices being activated
≥Press and hold [POWER Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.)
—
Messages/Troubleshooting guide
Troubleshooting guide
Power
No power.
≥Insert the AC power supply cord securely into a known active AC outlet.
The unit switches to standby
mode.
≥This is a power saving feature. It can be changed if desired using “Off Timer” in the Setup
menu.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [POWER Í/I] on the main unit to turn the
unit on.
60
14–16
—
Displays
The display is dim.
≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.
62
“12:00A” is flashing on the
unit’s display.
≥Set the clock. If you do not want to use the TV Guide On ScreenTM system, set the clock with
“Set Clock Automatically”.
64
Compared to the actual
recorded time, the elapsed time
displayed is less.
≥The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
—
The time recorded on the disc
and the available time shown
do not add up.
The play time shown for MP3
does not agree with the actual
time.
≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
≥Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is no
increase in disc space.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
≥More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.
≥While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
—
—
“U61” or “U88” is displayed
and the disc cannot be ejected.
≥The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.
1 Press [POWER Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [POWER Í/I] on the main unit for
about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
2 While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.
—
≥Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal, S VIDEO OUT
terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI AV OUT terminal on this unit.
≥Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., VIDEO 1) is correct.
≥Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.
Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY/a1.3) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5
seconds to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
≥To output video from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “HDMI Video Output” to
“On” in the Setup menu.
≥When connecting with a component video cable to a television that is incompatible with
progressive video, check if there is also an HDMI cable connected to an amplifier, etc. If so,
turn the power off to the device connected with an HDMI cable, and set the “HDMI Video
Output” to “Off” in the Setup menu.
≥Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
14–19
—
—
—
TV screen and video
The images from this unit do
not appear on the television.
Picture is distorted.
—
—
63
63
—
Continued on next page
RQT8365
69
EH55English.book Page 70 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Troubleshooting guide
TV screen and video (Continued)
Page
Television reception worsens
after connecting the unit.
≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment.
It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not
solved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
—
Status messages do not
appear.
≥Select “Automatic” in “Status Messages” in the Setup menu.
62
The blue background does not
appear.
≥Select “On” in “Blue Background” in the Setup menu.
62
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.
≥Use the television to change the aspect. Refer to your television’s operating instructions.
≥If connecting with a component video cable, set “Progressive” to “Off” in the Video menu. If
this doesn’t help or you cannot set it to “Off”, then set the “TV Type” to “4:3 TV Aspect 4:3
&480i” in the Setup menu.
≥Check the settings for “TV Type”, “4:3 TV Settings for DVD-Video” or “4:3 TV Settings for
DVD-RAM” in the Setup menu.
≥If you connect an HDMI cable, set “HDMI Output Display Aspect” to “Normal” in the Setup
menu.
Screen size is wrong.
The recorded title is stretched
vertically.
≥16:9 aspect programs are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.
–If you recorded to the HDD or a DVD-RAM and “Enable High-Speed Mode” was set to “On”
in the Setup menu. (The factory preset is “On”)
–If you recorded or copied to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL
or +RW.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.
—
43, 62
62, 63
63
61
—
There is a lot of after-image
when playing video.
≥Turn “DNR” off if it is on.
43
When playing DVD-Video using
progressive output, one part of
the picture momentarily
appears to be doubled up.
≥Set “Progressive” in the Video menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method or
material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.
≥When you use the HDMI AV OUT terminal for video output, follow the steps below for setting.
1 Connect this unit to the TV with any cable except the HDMI cable
2 Set “HDMI Video Output” to “Off” in the Setup menu
43
There is no apparent change in
picture quality when adjusted
with the Video menu in the onscreen menus.
≥The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
—
The channels keep changing.
≥When the unit is turned off, it uses the IR Blaster to scan the cable box or the DirecTV
receiver channels and acquire the program listings data. To watch a cable box or a DirecTV
receiver program (even if not recording) turn the unit back on.
—
≥Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the
amplifier if you have connected one.
≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Turn off V. Surround Sound in the following cases.
–When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
–When playing MTS broadcast programs.
≥[DVD-A] The disc may have a restriction on the method of audio output.
This unit cannot playback multi-channel discs that prevent down-mixing unless the unit is
connected with an HDMI cable to an amplifier supporting CPPM and the HDMI standard (ver.
1.1 or later). Refer to the disc jacket for more information.
≥Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
≥Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
≥The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT
terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
≥To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “HDMI Audio Output” to
“On” in the Setup menu.
≥If the sound is distorted when the unit is connected to an amplifier with the HDMI cable,
adjust the settings in “HDMI Connection Speakers Setting” in the Setup menu to match the
connection.
≥Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected
with an HDMI cable.
≥If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Enable High-Speed Mode” is set to “On”, you
can only record either the main or secondary audio of a MTS broadcast.
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW set “Enable High-Speed Mode” in the Setup menu to “Off”.
14–19,
62
27, 38
43
—
63
Sound
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio
type.
Cannot switch audio.
RQT8365
70
≥You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
–When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the
disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
–When the recording mode is XP and “Audio for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.
–When “Enable High-Speed Mode” is set to “On”. (The default setting is “On”.)
≥When connecting an amplifier using an optical digital cable or an HDMI cable, you cannot
switch the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect
using audio cables.
≥There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.
—
—
—
—
63
63
—
61
—
62
61
62, 18,
19
—
9:28 PM
Operation
Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t
work.
Page
≥Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the
code.
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote
control.
Press and hold [ENTER] and the indicated number button at the same
time for more than 2 seconds.
23
≥The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
≥You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during
operation.
≥Colored glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
≥Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight
exposure.
≥It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.
≥It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.
11
—
23
—
—
23
23
The unit is on but cannot be
operated.
≥Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
≥Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
≥The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
1 Press [POWER Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [POWER Í/I] on the main unit for
about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC power supply cord, wait one minute, then reconnect it.
2 Press [POWER Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated,
consult the dealer.
HDD activation is slow.
≥The HDD is in SLEEP mode. (“SLEEP” appears in the unit’s display.)
9
Cannot eject disc.
≥The unit is recording.
≥The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
—
—
Startup is slow.
≥Startup takes time in the following situations.
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
–The clock is not set.
–Immediately after a power failure or the AC power supply cord is connected.
–When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
—
≥It may take time to read a disc if it is being used for the first time in this unit or it has not been
used for a long time.
—
When the unit is turned on,
audio and video output takes a
long time.
Takes time to read DVD-RAM.
Troubleshooting guide
EH55English.book Page 71 Thursday, April 6, 2006
24, 36
—
—
—
Recording/Scheduled recording/Copying
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the
unit can record onto.
≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc using DVD Management. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW]
≥[RAM] The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with
DVD Management.
≥Some programs have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded. (CPRM)
≥You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached
its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.
≥You cannot directly record to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. You must first record
to the HDD, and then copy from the HDD to disc.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the
HDD and then copy.
–If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary).
–If the total number of titles recorded on the HDD or titles to be copied exceed 500:
≥You cannot record and copy on finalized discs.
However you can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW disc.
≥Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.
≥A DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this
unit may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.
≥If you connect a DISH Network, scheduled recording using the TV Guide On ScreenTM or
VCR Plusr system does not work. However, if DISH Network is selected in TV Guide Setup,
then you can set scheduled recordings with the DISH Network receiver.
4–6
57
56
76
45, 57
—
43, 44
—
—
—
28
Cannot record from external
equipment.
≥Check that the connection is correct.
≥Select the input channel (“IN1”, “IN2”, “IN3” or “DV”) for the equipment you have connected .
14–19, 53
—
Scheduled recording does not
work properly.
≥The scheduled program is incorrect or different scheduled program times overlap. Correct the
program.
≥The scheduled program may be deleted if there is an interruption to the power.
≥VCR Plusr system works properly only if you connect antenna or “cable-ready”.
≥If you connect a DISH Network, VCR Plusr system does not work properly.
30
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
2 Press [∫], then press [2, 1] to select “Stop recording” and press [ENTER].
Recording stops.
—
VCR Plusr system does not
work properly.
Scheduled recording does not
stop even when [∫] is pressed.
—
—
—
Continued on next page
RQT8365
71
EH55English.book Page 72 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Troubleshooting guide
Recording/Scheduled recording/Copying (Continued)
Page
The scheduled program
remains even after recording
finishes.
≥The scheduled program remains unless set to “once”.
A part or whole of a recorded
title has been lost.
≥If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household AC outlet while
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer
any guarantee regarding lost titles or discs.
57
The program name and the
recorded title do not match.
≥There was a program change after scheduled recording was set but the recorded title still has
the old program name.
—
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.
disc using the high-speed
mode.
≥If “Enable High-Speed Mode” is set to “Off” in the Setup menu before recording to the HDD,
then high-speed copy cannot be performed. (The default setting is “On”).
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in FR mode (recordings 5 hours or longer) or EP mode, you
cannot perform high-speed copy.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in high-speed mode with other Panasonic DVD recorders,
and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or +RW discs with highspeed copy.
61
≥Use a disc that is compatible with high-speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed
recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the
disc.
≥It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
≥You cannot high-speed copy to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL
and +RW, titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not
compatible with EP (8 hour) mode recording.
—
An unusually loud sound is
coming from the rotating DVDR, etc.
≥When recording or high-speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal;
however, this is not a problem.
—
The DV camcorder recording
function does not work.
≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV
equipment settings.
≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV
equipment are not successive.
≥Depending on the equipment, the DV camcorder recording may not operate properly.
≥You can only record audio/video images on a DV tape.
53
≥Scheduled recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is turned on/off. Turn on
the power to confirm the contents of the scheduled recording.
—
≥Leave the unit turned off for at least 24 hours.
≥Initial setup was done incorrectly. (e.g, The user entered the wrong country, ZIP/postal code
or cable box information.) Select “Change system settings” menu and verify the data entered
during initial setup. If the settings are wrong, set up the TV Guide On ScreenTM system again.
≥Check the connection and set up the TV Guide On ScreenTM system again.
If you connect a cable box and/or a DirecTV receiver
–the output terminal of the cable box and/or the DirecTV receiver is connected to this unit’s
IN3 terminal
–the IR Blaster is correctly connected and installed
–the cable box and/or the DirecTV receiver is turned on
If you do not connect a cable box and a DirecTV receiver
–the antenna cable is connected to this unit’s RF IN terminal
≥The program listings were temporarily unavailable in your area (Wait another 24 hours or
Redo setup).
≥The program listings are not available in your area. Set the unit using “Set Channels
Automatically”. Note that you can only manually set scheduled recording after you set the unit
using “Set Channels Automatically”.
≥Consult your service provider if you are using a cable box or a satellite receiver.
≥The TV Guide On ScreenTM system may not be able to receive the program listings data if
reception is poor. This may be improved by using a booster. Consult your dealer.
≥The TV Guide On ScreenTM system can be used when 480i mode is selected on the DirecTV
receiver.
≥If you are watching DirecTV in 4:3 aspect with the side panel, set the side panel to “Off” on
the DirecTV receiver in order to correctly receive program listings.
—
34
When copying, it takes a long
time even when high-speed
mode is selected.
There is no picture on the
television during scheduled
recording.
28, 29,
32
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
TV Guide On ScreenTM system
Although initial setup for the
TV Guide On ScreenTM system
was completed hours ago,
program listings do not display
when [TV GUIDE] is pressed.
“Cable code -INCOMPLETE-”
appears in the TV Guide On
ScreenTM system setup.
RQT8365
72
≥The unit cannot find the correct IR code for the cable box. Consult your service provider.
34
15, 16
15
—
14
—
64
—
—
—
—
—
9:28 PM
TV Guide On ScreenTM system (Continued)
Page
≥For a newly installed unit, the TV Guide On Screen system may not have been given
enough time to download the initial data. This procedure can only occur when the unit is in
standby mode for a period of 24 hours. (During this time, do not turn on the unit as the
download will be interrupted.) Once the procedure takes place the phrase “No Listing” will be
replaced with program information.
≥The channel(s) in question was (were) recently turned “ON” (in the CHANNEL EDITOR
screen); however, TV Guide On ScreenTM system has yet to receive channel data for this
channel. Leave the unit in standby mode.
≥Immediately after beginning use there are several days of blank listings. You can display the
program listings for up to the next 8 days without any blank listings by downloading program
listings continuously over several days.
≥The unit was left turned on for an extended period of time and the TV Guide On ScreenTM
system was unable to receive program listings data. Press [Í DVD POWER] to set the unit
in standby mode when not in use.
≥During the data download the station from which data is downloaded had an unscheduled
power outage.
≥If using an over-the-air antenna, marginally poor reception can cause some of the data to be
missed.
≥If using a cable box and/or a satellite receiver, it was accidentally turned off. In installations
using a cable box and/or a satellite receiver, the box must be left on continuously.
—
Cannot receive some channels
displayed on the program
listings.
≥Cable TV subscribers receive channel data for all available channels your cable TV provider
offers. In order to view all the channels, you’d also have to subscribe to all the channels. If
you are connected to an over-the-air antenna the channel data you receive often represents
a viewing area larger than you would typically be able to receive. Your location, the type of TV
antenna you are using and your distance from each station’s transmitting antenna will all
determine which channels are viewable from your location. Once you’ve determined which
channels can be received, all others can be removed from the program listings. Set these
channels to “OFF” in the CHANNEL EDITOR screen.
34
Some over-the-air or cable
channels are not listed on the
program listings and even on
the CHANNEL EDITOR screen.
≥Presently, the TV Guide On ScreenTM system does not list all channels in any given
broadcast area. As a result, channels are selected primarily on a “majority rules” basis.
Channels with the highest potential viewership are given top priority.
≥Data for local programming which is not provided to TV Guide’s data distribution network
would also not be available.
—
The program highlighted
doesn’t match up with the
video window on the TV
screen.
≥The data entered during the initial setup was incorrect (e.g., The user entered the wrong ZIP/
postal code or selected the incorrect channel line-up). Select “Change system settings”
menu and verify the data entered during initial setup. If the settings are wrong, set up the TV
Guide On ScreenTM system again.
≥The Video window is locked to remain on the channel you were previously watching.
≥The station in question may have made recent program schedule changes and the TV Guide
On ScreenTM system has not yet been updated.
≥The cable company has not yet informed industry sources of their channel line-up changes.
Use the CHANNEL EDITOR feature to make adjustments.
34
Two stations are received on
certain channels; morning and
evening programs differ.
≥Such situations occur more frequently on cable TV. “Split” channels occur when the cable
provider may not have an adequate number of open channels and chooses to switch the
channel line to better suit the subscribers’ viewing habits. When a “Split” channel occurs,
program data for only one channel is usually provided.
—
Cable box/satellite receiver
doesn’t change channels with
TV Guide On ScreenTM system.
≥The incorrect cable box/satellite receiver brand code was selected during the initial setup.
Select “Change system settings” menu and verify the data entered during initial setup. If the
setting is wrong, set up the TV Guide On ScreenTM system again.
≥The user has incorrectly connected or positioned the IR Blaster. Please reconnect or
reposition it. Select “Change system settings” menu and verify the data entered during initial
setup.
≥The cable box/satellite receiver has no remote capability and is incompatible. Consult your
service provider.
≥The user has a type of “after market” brand cable box or a satellite receiver other than
DirecTV, and it may be incompatible. Consult your service provider.
34
Some or all of the channels
display “No Listing”.
The unit doesn’t change
channels or it changes to the
wrong channel.
Some channels are listed on
the wrong number.
Cannot record a program. The
screen remains snowy or blue.
TM
If you do not connect a cable box and a satellite receiver
≥The unit was hooked up incorrectly. Please reconnect it.
≥The user selected the incorrect channel-lineup. Select “Change system settings” menu and
verify the data entered during initial setup. If the setting is wrong, set up the TV Guide On
ScreenTM system again.
If you connect a cable box and/or a satellite receiver
≥The unit was hooked up incorrectly. Please reconnect it, or contact the cable company for
proper wiring procedure.
≥The unit is not set to the correct output channel. Select “Change system settings” menu and
verify the data entered during initial setup. If the setting is wrong, redo the setup correctly
choosing 03, 04 or the output channel set by your cable system.
≥The cable box or the satellite receiver was left OFF. The user should always leave the cable
box or the satellite receiver turned on and the unit turned off (when not in use).
The SCHEDULE screen only
shows the channel number of
the program instead of the
program name.
≥The time slot and channel for the scheduled program may not have yet received program
listings information. Once updated information is received the program name will appear in
the SCHEDULE screen.
≥If you manually set a scheduled recording the TV program name is not displayed.
—
—
Troubleshooting guide
EH55English.book Page 73 Thursday, April 6, 2006
—
—
—
—
—
31
—
34
15, 34
—
—
14–18
34
15–18
34
—
—
—
Continued on next page
RQT8365
73
EH55English.book Page 74 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Troubleshooting guide
Play
Page
≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalized on the equipment used for recording.
≥You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM
using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8H) mode, play may not be possible on DVD players
that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6H) mode.
≥You cannot play discs during DV camcorder recording.
≥If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)
13
10
4–6
—
—
≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
≥This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on +RW, finalized DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL that have been copied using the
high speed mode.
≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal program. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
—
—
DVD-Video is not played.
≥You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.
61
Alternative soundtrack and
subtitles cannot be selected.
≥The languages are not recorded on the disc.
≥You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on
some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.
—
37
No subtitles.
≥When progressive output is on, closed captions cannot be displayed.
≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
≥Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.
—
—
42
Play fails to start even when
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
Audio and video momentarily
pause.
61
—
40
—
—
Angle cannot be changed.
≥Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.
—
You have forgotten your ratings
password.
You want to cancel the ratings
level.
≥The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press
[DRIVE SELECT] to select DVD drive then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the
main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).
—
Quick View does not work.
≥This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
≥This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
—
—
The resume play function does
not work.
≥Memorized positions are canceled when
–press [∫] several times.
–open the disc tray (excluding [HDD]).
–[DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] [SD] MP3/DivX: turn off the power.
–a recording or scheduled recording was executed.
—
It takes time before play starts.
≥It will take a little time for DivX videos to start playing. (DivX)
—
Picture stops.
≥Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)
—
Cannot edit.
≥If there is not enough disc space on the HDD, you cannot edit on the HDD. Delete some
unnecessary titles to create some disc space.
43
Cannot format.
≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.
10
4–6
Cannot create chapters.
≥The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the
disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.
≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before a
start point.
—
Cannot delete chapters.
≥When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.
45
The available recording time
doesn’t increase even after
deleting recordings on the
disc.
≥Available recording space on the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R and +R DL does not increase even
after deleting previously recorded titles.
≥Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when
the last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.
—
Cannot create a playlist.
≥You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select
them individually.
—
Cannot display Direct
Navigator screen.
≥This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.
—
Cannot edit or format a card.
≥Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message
sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)
56
The contents of the card
cannot be read.
≥The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.)
Format using FAT12 or FAT16 with other equipment or format the card with this unit.
≥The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this
unit.
≥Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB on this unit.
6, 7, 57,
76
76
Edit
Cannot mark the start point or
the end point during “Shorten
Title” operation.
—
—
—
Still pictures
RQT8365
74
—
6
Copying, deleting and setting
protection takes a long time.
≥When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.
≥When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or
card.
—
57
Scheduled recording began in
the middle of editing a still
picture.
≥If it comes to the time scheduled for recording, the recording may start even though you are
editing.
—
EH55English.book Page 75 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Recordable discs:
DVD-RAM: Ver. 2.0
Ver. 2.1/3X–SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 1.0
Ver. 2.2/5X–SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 2.0
DVD-R:
for General Ver. 2.0
for General Ver. 2.0/4X–SPEED DVD-R Revision 1.0
for General Ver. 2.x/8X–SPEED DVD-R Revision 3.0
for General Ver. 2.x/16X–SPEED DVD-R Revision 6.0
for DL Ver. 3.0
for DL Ver. 3.x/4X–SPEED DVD-R for DL Revision 1.0
DVD-RW:
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.x/2X–SPEED DVD-RW Revision 1.0
Ver. 1.x/4X–SPEED DVD-RW Revision 2.0
Ver. 1.x/6X–SPEED DVD-RW Revision 3.0
+R:
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2
Ver. 1.3
for DL Ver. 1.0
+RW:
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 1.2/4X–SPEED
Recording system:
DVD-RAM:
DVD-R:
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-RW:
+R:
+R DL (Double Layer):
+RW:
Internal HDD Capacity:
DVD Video Recording format
DVD-Video format
DVD-Video format
DVD-Video format
Audio system
Recording system:
Analog Input:
LINE (pin jack) a3
Reference input: 309 mVrms
FS: 2 Vrms (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Input impedance: 47 k≠
Analog Output:
LINE (pin jack) a2
Reference output: 309 mVrms
FS: 2 Vrms (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Output impedance: 1 k≠
(Load impedance: 10 k≠)
Number of channels:
Digital Output:
HDMI Output:
SD Card Slot:
Still Picture (JPEG,
TIFF)
Compatible media
≥Maximum approx. 355 hours with 200 GB HDD (EP 8H mode)
XP: Approx. 44 hours SP: Approx. 89 hours
LP: Approx. 177 hours EP: Approx. 266 hours or 355 hours
1 pc
SD Memory Card Slot
SD Memory Card§, MultiMediaCard
Includes miniSDTM cards. (A miniSDTM
adaptor needs to be inserted.)
FAT 12, FAT 16
JPEG conforming to DCF (Design rule for
Camera File system)
TIFF (Uncompressed RGB chunky),
DPOF Compatible
Sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
Number of pixels:
between 34 a 34 and 6144 a 4096 pixels
Thawing time:
SD Video (MPEG2)
Compatible media
File Format
Approx. 3 sec (6M pixels, JPEG)
SD Memory Card§, MultiMediaCard
§ Includes miniSDTM cards. (A miniSDTM
adaptor needs to be inserted.)
MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video
Profile)
SD-Video format conforming
Video Recording conversion and
transfer is possible from card to HDD
or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and
transfer to HDD or DVD-RAM disc, the
playback is possible.
§
DV input:
G-LINK Terminal:
LASER Specification
Class I LASER Product
Wave Length: 780 nm (CDs)
662 nm (DVDs)
Laser Power: No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety
protection
Clock unit:
NTSC system, 525 lines, 60 fields
TV Channel:
2 ch–69 ch
CATV Channel: 1 ch–125 ch
Not provided
(19 pin type A) a1 HDMI Ver.1.2a (EDID
Ver.1.3)
Image file format:
Optical pick-up:
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
Television system
TV system:
Antenna reception
input:
RF converter output:
Video system
Recording system:
Digital audio optical output connector a1
(PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS)
Format
Codec
Playable discs:
DVD-RAM:
DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R:
DVD-Video format, DivX
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):DVD-Video format
DVD-RW:
DVD-Video format,
DVD Video Recording format
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD
CD-R/CD-RW (CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, JPEG, DivX)
Recording: 2 channels
Playback: 2 channels
§
200 GB
Recording time:
≥Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour
SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours
EP: Approx. 6 hours or 8 hours
Dolby Digital (2ch), Linear PCM (XP
mode 2ch)
Troubleshooting guide/Specifications
Specifications
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 Pin: 1 pc
only use the included IR Blaster
‚1
Regional Code:
Quartz-controlled 12-hour digital display
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Dimensions (WkHkD):
Mass:
5 oC to 40 oC (41 oF to 104 oF)
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Approx. 33 W
Approx. 430 mmk58 mmk329 mm
(Approx.1615/16qk25/16qk13q)
Approx. 4.2 kg (9.24 lbs)
Power consumption in standby mode:
approx. 13.5 W
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
[Note]
Input:
LINE (pin jack) a3, 1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
S connector a3
Y:1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
C: 0.286 Vp-p; 75 ≠
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Mass and dimensions are approximate.
Output:
LINE (pin jack) a2, 1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
S connector a2
Y:1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
C: 0.286 Vp-p; 75 ≠
Component video
output:
Y, PB, PR a1
(480i/480p)
≥Useable capacity will be less (SD Memory Card).
Y: 1.0 Vp-p; 75 ≠
PB: 0.7 Vp-p; 75 ≠
PR: 0.7 Vp-p; 75 ≠
RQT8365
75
EH55English.book Page 76 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Glossary
Bitstream
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
CPPM (Content Protection for Prerecorded Media)
A copy protection system used for DVD-Audio files. This unit
supports CPPM.
Structure of folders displayed by this unit
The following
can be displayed on this unit.
¢¢¢: Numbers
XXX: Letters
Card
DVD-RAM
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
DCIM (Higher folder)
JPEG
DCIM¢¢¢ (Higher folder)
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
¢¢¢XXXXX (Picture folder)
¢¢¢XXXXX (Picture folder)
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
DivX
A video compression format developed by DivXNetworks, Inc. that
compresses video files without any considerable loss of video
quality.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
DPOF is the standard printing format for still picture data taken by a
digital camera, etc. It is used for automatic printing at a photo
developing store or on your home printer.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc (DVD)
and SD card (SD). These perform the reading and writing of data.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialog clearly.
EPG (Electronic Program Guide)
This is a system used to display program listings on televisions,
computers and cellular phones. Data is transmitted using the
internet or television waves. This unit is compatible with the method
using television waves. You can use program listings for functions
such as scheduled recording.
Film and video
DVD-Video are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film: Recorded at 24 frames per second. (Recorded at 30 frames
per second as well). Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Video: Recorded at 30 frames/60 fields per second. Generally
appropriate for TV drama programs or animation.
Finalize
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalize
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL on
this unit.
After finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalized DVD-RW can be formatted to
become recordable.
RQT8365
76
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk or memory card where groups of
data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place
where still pictures (JPEG, TIFF) and MPEG2 are stored.
IM¢¢CDPF or IMEXPORT §
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
§
DCIM
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can
be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default audio.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then
only output the front two channels.
[DVD-A] Tracks that do not allow down-mixing will not play correctly
on this unit except when connecting with an HDMI cable to an
amplifier that meets HDMI standards (ver. 1.1 or later) and is CPPM
compatible.
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
¢¢¢XXXXX
SD_VIDEO
PRG¢¢¢(MPEG2 folder)
XXXX¢¢¢¢.JPG
MOV¢¢¢.MOD
MOV¢¢¢.MOI
PRG¢¢¢.PGI
MGR_INFO (MPEG2 information
folder)
XXXX¢¢¢¢.TIF
§
Folders can be created on other equipment. However, these
folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.
≥The folder cannot be displayed if the numbers are all “0” (e.g.,
DCIM000 etc).
≥If a folder name or file name has been input using other
equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may
not be able to play or edit the data.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD memory card and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on
this unit. Formatting irrevocably deletes all contents.
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
u
r
Frame
Field
Field
≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
HDMI is a next-generation digital interface for consumer electronic
products. Unlike conventional connections, it transmits
uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This
unit supports high-definition video output [750p (720p), 1125i
(1080i)] from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video
a high definition compatible television is required.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding color still pictures. If
you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the
data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs. LPCM sound is available when recording in XP mode.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding color video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programs using MPEG2.
MPEG2 moving picture files shot with a Panasonic SD multi-camera,
etc. can be copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
9:28 PM
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to approximately
one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of audio quality. You
can play MP3 you have recorded onto CD-R and CD-RW.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Protection
You can prevent accidental erasure by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Pan&Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture fills
the screen.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture itself
appears in an aspect ratio of 16:9.
TIFF (Tag Image File Format)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding color still pictures, a
common format for storing high quality images on digital cameras
and other devices.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Progressive/Interlace
NTSC, the video signal standard, has 480 interlaced (i) scan lines,
whereas progressive scanning uses twice the number of scan lines.
This is called 480p.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Language code list
Abkhazian:
6566
Afar:
6565
Afrikaans:
6570
Albanian:
8381
Ameharic:
6577
Arabic:
6582
Armenian:
7289
Assamese:
6583
Aymara:
6589
Azerbaijani:
6590
Bashkir:
6665
Basque:
6985
Bengali; Bangla:
6678
Bhutani:
6890
Bihari:
6672
Breton:
6682
Bulgarian:
6671
Burmese:
7789
Byelorussian: 6669
Cambodian:
7577
Glossary/Product Service
EH55English.book Page 77 Thursday, April 6, 2006
1080i
In one high definition image, 1125 (1080) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/60th of a second to create an interlace image. Because 1125i
(1080i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of 480i, the
detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic and rich image.
720p
In one high definition image, 750 (720) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/60th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Catalan:
Chinese:
Corsican:
Croatian:
Czech:
Danish:
Dutch:
English:
Esperanto:
Estonian:
Faroese:
Fiji:
Finnish:
French:
Frisian:
Galician:
Georgian:
German:
Greek:
Greenlandic:
Guarani:
6765
9072
6779
7282
6783
6865
7876
6978
6979
6984
7079
7074
7073
7082
7089
7176
7565
6869
6976
7576
7178
Gujarati:
7185
Hausa:
7265
Hebrew:
7387
Hindi:
7273
Hungarian:
7285
Icelandic:
7383
Indonesian:
7378
Interlingua:
7365
Irish:
7165
Italian:
7384
Japanese:
7465
Javanese:
7487
Kannada:
7578
Kashmiri:
7583
Kazakh:
7575
Kirghiz:
7589
Korean:
7579
Kurdish:
7585
Laotian:
7679
Latin:
7665
Latvian, Lettish:7686
Lingala:
7678
Lithuanian:
7684
Macedonian: 7775
Malagasy:
7771
Malay:
7783
Malayalam:
7776
Maltese:
7784
Maori:
7773
Marathi:
7782
Moldavian:
7779
Mongolian:
7778
Nauru:
7865
Nepali:
7869
Norwegian:
7879
Oriya:
7982
Pashto, Pushto:8083
Persian:
7065
Polish:
8076
Portuguese:
8084
Punjabi:
8065
Quechua:
8185
Rhaeto-Romance:
8277
Romanian:
8279
Russian:
8285
Samoan:
8377
Sanskrit:
8365
Scots Gaelic: 7168
Serbian:
8382
Serbo-Croatian:8372
Shona:
8378
Sindhi:
8368
Singhalese:
8373
Slovak:
8375
Slovenian:
8376
Somali:
8379
Spanish:
6983
Sundanese:
8385
Swahili:
8387
Swedish:
8386
Tagalog:
8476
Tajik:
8471
Tamil:
Tatar:
Telugu:
Thai:
Tibetan:
Tigrinya:
Tonga:
Turkish:
Turkmen:
Twi:
Ukrainian:
Urdu:
Uzbek:
Vietnamese:
Volapük:
Welsh:
Wolof:
Xhosa:
Yiddish:
Yoruba:
Zulu:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
Product Service
1. Damage requiring service—The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel if:
(a) The AC power supply cord or AC adaptor has been damaged; or
(b) Objects or liquids have gotten into the unit; or
(c) The unit has been exposed to rain; or
(d) The unit does not operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or
(e) The unit has been dropped or the cabinet damaged.
2. Servicing—Do not attempt to service the unit beyond that described in these operating instructions. Refer all other servicing to authorized
servicing personnel.
3. Replacement parts—When parts need replacing ensure the servicer uses parts specified by the manufacturer or parts that have the same
characteristics as the original parts. Unauthorized substitutes may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.
4. Safety check—After repairs or service, ask the servicer to perform safety checks to confirm that the unit is in proper working condition.
Product information
For product information or assistance with product operation:
In the U.S.A., refer to “Customer Services Directory” on page 78.
In Canada, contact the Panasonic Canada Inc. Customer Care Centre at 1-800-561-5505, or visit the website (www.panasonic.ca), or an
authorized Servicentre closest to you.
RQT8365
77
EH55English.book Page 78 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR U.S.A.)
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company,
Division of Panasonic Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5
San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985
Panasonic DVD Recorder
Limited Warranty
Limited Warranty Coverage
If your product does not work properly because of a defect in materials or workmanship,
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company or Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc. (collectively
referred to as “the warrantor”) will, for the length of the period indicated on the chart below,
which starts with the date of original purchase (“warranty period”), at its option either (a)
repair your product with new or refurbished parts, or (b) replace it with a new or a
refurbished product. The decision to repair or replace will be made by the warrantor.
Parts
Labor
DVD Recorder
Product or Part Name
One (1) Year
One (1) Year
Rechargeable Batteries,
DVD-RAM Disc (in
exchange for defective
item)
Ten (10) Days
Not Applicable
During the “Labor” warranty period there will be no charge for labor. During the “Parts”
warranty period, there will be no charge for parts. You must carry-in or mail-in your product
during the warranty period. If non-rechargeable batteries are included, they are not
warranted. This warranty only applies to products purchased and serviced in the United
States or Puerto Rico. This warranty is extended only to the original purchaser of a new
product which was not sold “as is”. A purchase receipt or other proof of the original
purchase date is required for warranty service.
Carry-In or Mail-In Service
For Carry-In or Mail-In Service in the United States call 1-800-211-PANA (7262) or visit
Panasonic Web Site: http://www.panasonic.com
For assistance in Puerto Rico call Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc. (787)-750-4300 or fax
(787)-768-2910.
Limited Warranty Limits And Exclusions
This warranty ONLY COVERS failures due to defects in materials or workmanship, and
DOES NOT COVER normal wear and tear or cosmetic damage. The warranty ALSO DOES
NOT COVER damages which occurred in shipment, or failures which are caused by
products not supplied by the warrantor, or failures which result from accidents, misuse,
abuse, neglect, mishandling, misapplication, alteration, faulty installation, set-up
adjustments, misadjustment of consumer controls, improper maintenance, power line
surge, lightning damage, modification, or commercial use (such as in a hotel, office,
restaurant, or other business), rental use of the product, service by anyone other than a
Factory Servicenter or other Authorized Servicer, or damage that is attributable to acts of
God.
THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS LISTED UNDER
“LIMITED WARRANTY COVERAGE”. THE WARRANTOR IS NOT LIABLE
FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF
THIS WARRANTY. (As examples, this excludes damages for lost time, travel
to and from the servicer, loss of media or images, data or other recorded
content. The items listed are not exclusive, but are for illustration only.) ALL
EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THE LIMITED
WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts,
so the exclusions may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state. If a problem with this product develops
during or after the warranty period, you may contact your dealer or
Servicenter. If the problem is not handled to your satisfaction, then write to the
warrantor’s Consumer Affairs Department at the addresses listed for the
warrantor.
PARTS AND SERVICE WHICH ARE NOT COVERED BY THIS LIMITED
WARRANTY ARE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
Customer Services Directory
Obtain Product Information and Operating Assistance; locate your nearest Dealer or Servicenter; purchase Parts and
Accessories; or make Customer Service and Literature requests by visiting our Web Site at:
http://www.panasonic.com/consumersupport
or, contact us via the web at:
http://www.panasonic.com/contactinfo
You may also contact us directly at:
1-800-211-PANA (7262),
Monday-Friday 9 am-9 pm; Saturday-Sunday 10 am-7 pm, EST.
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY : 1-877-833-8855
Accessory Purchases
Purchase Parts, Accessories and Instruction Books online for all Panasonic Products by visiting our Web Site at:
http://www.pasc.panasonic.com
or, send your request by E-mail to:
npcparts@us.panasonic.com
You may also contact us directly at:
1-800-332-5368 (Phone) 1-800-237-9080 (Fax Only) (Monday – Friday 9 am to 8 pm, EST.)
Panasonic Services Company
20421 84th Avenue South, Kent, WA 98032
(We Accept Visa, MasterCard, Discover Card, American Express, and Personal Checks)
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY : 1-866-605-1277
Service in Puerto Rico
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5, San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985
Phone (787)750-4300, Fax (787)768-2910
F1104
RQT8365
78
EH55English.book Page 79 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Panasonic Canada Inc.
PANASONIC PRODUCT—LIMITED WARRANTY
Panasonic Canada Inc. warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship and agrees to remedy any such defect for a
period as stated below from the date of original purchase.
Technics Audio Product
Panasonic Portable/Clock Radio (without Tape, CD, MD)
Panasonic Audio/SD Audio Product
Panasonic DVD Product
Accessories including rechargeable batteries
One (1) year, parts and labour
One (1) year, parts and labour
One (1) year, parts and labour
One (1) year, parts and labour
Ninety (90) days
LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS
This warranty does not apply to products purchased outside Canada or to any product which has been improperly installed, subjected to usage
for which the product was not designed, misused or abused, damaged during shipping, or which has been altered or repaired in any way that
affects the reliability or detracts from the performance, nor does it cover any product which is used commercially. Dry cell batteries are also
excluded from coverage under this warranty.
This warranty is extended to the original end user purchaser only. A purchase receipt or other proof of date of original purchase is required before
warranty service is performed.
THIS EXPRESS, LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT WILL PANASONIC CANADA INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
In certain instances, some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or the exclusion of implied
warranties, so the above limitations and exclusions may not be applicable.
WARRANTY SERVICE
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR U.S.A.)/Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR CANADA)
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR CANADA)
FOR PRODUCT OPERATION ASSISTANCE, please contact:
Our Customer Care Centre: Telephone #:
1-800 #:
Fax #:
Email link:
(905) 624-5505
1-800-561-5505
(905) 238-2360
“Contact Us” on www.panasonic.ca
FOR PRODUCT REPAIRS, please locate your nearest Authorized Servicentre at www.panasonic.ca :
Link : “ServicentresTM locator” under “Customer support”
IF YOU SHIP THE PRODUCT TO A SERVICENTRE
Carefully pack and send prepaid, adequately insured and preferably in the original carton.
Include details of the defect claimed, and proof of date of original purchase.
RQT8365
79
EH55English.book Page 80 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Instalación básica
≥Para más información sobre los métodos de conexión, vea la página de inicio de Panasonic. (Sólo está en inglés.)
http://www.panasonic.com/consumer_electronics/dvd_recorder/dvd_connection.asp
≥Antes de hacer la conexión, apague todos los equipos y lea los manuales de instrucciones apropiados.
Cuando usa un servicio de cable o un servicio de satélite.
≥Es menester que se abone a un servicio televisivo de cable o de satélite para que pueda ver sus programas.
≥Consulte a su proveedor del servicio por lo que respecta a la apropiada caja del cable o receptor de satélite.
∫ Terminal RF OUT
∫ Cuando la unidad no vaya a utilizarse durante
mucho tiempo
La señal de imagen y sonido desde esta unidad a su televisor no
pasa a través del terminal RF OUT.
Asegúrese de que esté conectado a su televisor uno de los
siguientes terminales en esta unidad: el terminal AUDIO/VIDEO
OUT, el terminal S VIDEO OUT, el terminal COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT o el terminal HDMI AV OUT.
Para ahorrar energía, desenchufe la unidad de la toma de CA. Esta
unidad consume una pequeña cantidad de energía aunque se
encuentre apagada (13,5 W aproximadamente).
Repare en que los listados de programas no se descargan
mientras que la unidad está desenchufada.
Conexión a un televisor y caja del cable o receptor DirecTV
≥Si su televisor no tiene
terminales AUDIO/VIDEO,
es necesario un
modulador RF.
≥Si goza de una más alta
calidad de la imagen.
(➡ abajo)
Antena del
Cable que procede de
satélite
(sólo receptor de la pared o señal de
antena
satélite)
1
2
4
RF
IN
PB
AV OUT
PR
OPTICAL
IN3
IN3
R-AUDIO-L
5
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S VIDEO
75 ≠ cable
coaxial
(incluido)
75 ≠ cable coaxial
AC IN
Rojo
Blanco Amarillo
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO S VIDEO
G-LINK
6
Cable de
audio/vídeo
Cable
RF
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
3
Rojo Blanco Amarillo OUT
IN
Satellite
Esta unidad
Y
Rojo Blanco Amarillo
OUT2
RF OUT
Rojo Blanco Amarillo
Cable de audio/vídeo (incluido)
OUT1
RF
OUT
VHF/UHF
VHF/UHF
RF IN
IN1
75 ≠ cable
coaxial
Televisor
AUDIO IN
R L VIDEO IN
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
7
IR Blaster
(incluido)
Ver abajo
Cable de alimentación
de CA (incluido)
Conecte solamente
después de haber
finalizado todas las
demás conexiones.
8
A la toma doméstica de CA
(CA 120 V, 60 Hz)
S-VIDEO
Caja del cable o receptor DirecTV
¿Por qué tengo que conectar el IR Blaster?
El IR Blaster es necesario para que funcione una caja del cable o un receptor DirecTV con el mando a distancia de esta unidad.
Además, si el IR Blaster no está correctamente conectado o configurado, no puede hacer grabaciones programadas ni descargar
listados de programas.
Ajustar el IR Blaster
Coloque el IR Blaster delante del sensor de la señal de la caja del cable o del receptor DirecTV.
Si es necesario, utilice la cinta adhesiva de doble cara (incluida) para sujetar el
Lea las instrucciones de funcionamiento de la
IR Blaster a una superficie llana.
caja del cable o del receptor DirecTV por lo que
por ejemplo la superficie del soporte del televisor
respecta a la colocación del sensor de la señal.
Si despega la cinta adhesiva, la superficie podría
dañarse.
Una vez que haya confirmado que la caja del cable o
del receptor DirecTV está funcionando correctamente,
sujételo uniéndolo con la cinta adhesiva.
Caja del cable o del receptor DirecTV
Para gozar de una calidad de la imagen aún más alta
∫ Terminal S VIDEO OUT
∫ Terminal HDMI AV OUT
Los terminales S VIDEO OUT logran una imagen más viva que la
del terminal VIDEO OUT. (El resultado real depende del televisor.)
HDMI es la interfaz de nueva generación para dispositivos digitales.
Cuando conectada a una unidad compatible con la HDMI, se
transmite una señal digital de vídeo y audio sin comprimir. Sólo con
un cable puede gozar del vídeo y el audio digital de alta calidad.
Cuando conecta un HDTV (televisor de alta definición) compatible
con la HDMI, la salida puede ser conmutada al vídeo HD 1125i
(1080i) o 750p (720p).
Ajuste lo siguiente:
Desde el menú CONFIGURACIÓN, “Salida de video HDMI”:
“Activado” (predeterminado en la fábrica)
Desde el menú CONFIGURACIÓN, “Salida de audio HDMI”:
“Activado” (predeterminado en la fábrica)
∫ Terminales COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Estos terminales pueden usarse para el entrelazado o la salida
progresiva y proporcionan una imagen más clara que la del terminal
S VIDEO OUT.
Conecte a los terminales del mismo color.
RQT8365
80
9:28 PM
DRIVE SELECT
Ranura de
tarjeta SD W X CH
∫ 1 ¥ REC
Bandeja de disco
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE
DV IN
k1.3
1.3
S VIDEO VIDEO L/MONO-AUDIO-R
IN2
< OPEN/CLOSE
POWER Í/ l
DVD
Í DVD POWER
REC
DRIVE
SELECT
CH
POWER
TV
Í
POWER
Í
VOLUME
CH
DRIVE TV/VIDEO
SELECT
DRIVE SELECT
PAGE
Botones
numéricos
:, 9
;
∫
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
INPUT
CANCEL
0 SELECT
SKIP
PAUSE
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
ENTER
A
B
¥ REC
REC MODE
RETURN
S
AUDIO
A
REC
1
TV GUIDE
TV GUIDE
SUB MENU
SUB MENU
6, 5
SCHEDULE
TIONS
FU N C
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
DELETE
PLAY/x1.3
TIME SLIP
W X CH
PAGE W X
VCR Plus
Plusi
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
TIME SLIP
CH
CREATE
DISPLAY CHAPTER
Info
B
REC MODE STATUS CM SKIP
2;, ;1
3,4,2,1
ENTER
RETURN
Info
CM SKIP
Configuración del sistema TV Guide On ScreenTM
Después de enchufar la unidad en la toma doméstica de CA y luego
de pulsar [Í DVD POWER] para encenderla por la primera vez,
ésta inicia su lenguaje, proporciona el tipo de aspecto TV y
configura el sistema TV Guide On ScreenTM.
Si usa un servicio de satélite diferente de DirecTV, no puede
recibir los listados de programas en esta unidad.
Preparación
≥Encienda el televisor y seleccione la entrada de vídeo apropiada a
las conexiones de esta unidad.
≥Cuando usa la caja del cable o un receptor DirecTV, compruebe lo
siguiente.
–Asegúrese de que esté conectado y colocado correctamente el
IR Blaster (➡ 80).
–Asegúrese de que esté encendida la caja del cable o el receptor
DirecTV.
1 Pulse [Í DVD POWER].
2 Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar el idioma y luego pulse [ENTER].
Si hace un error, pulse [RETURN] para volver a la pantalla anterior.
3 Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar “TV de 4:3” o “TV ancho de
16:9” y luego pulse [ENTER]. Va a tener comienzo la
configuración de la guía TV. Pulse [ENTER].
En el sistema TV Guide On ScreenTM sólo se visualiza el
inglés. Los demás idiomas no se visualizan.
Siguiendo los mensajes en la pantalla, inserte el ambiente
operativo para su televisor.
Funcionamiento básico del mando a distancia
Para seleccionar un elemento ➔
[3, 4, 2, 1]
Para confirmar
➔
Pulse [ENTER]
Para ver la información de ayuda ➔
Pulse [Info]
Para insertar los números
➔
Pulse los botones numéricos
≥Seleccione “Next” y luego pulse [ENTER] para pasar a la
pantalla siguiente.
≥Seleccione “Back” y luego pulse [ENTER] para volver a la
pantalla anterior.
4 Ajuste el país (USA/Canada) (EE.UU./Canadá)
5 Ajuste el código ZIP (Postal)
6 Ajuste el/los servicio/s a ser usado/s.
Puede seleccionar hasta 2 servicios.
Cuando selecciona “Antenna” o “Cable without a Cable Box”,
≥No puede seleccionar conjuntamente “Antenna” y “Cable
without a Cable Box”.
≥No se precisa configuración adicional.
Cuando selecciona “Cable with a Cable Box”, ajuste lo siguiente:
1 Canal de conexión de la caja del cable
(“RF, Channel 2”/ “RF, Channel 3”/ “RF, Channel 4”/ “IN3”)
2 ¿Está usando un paquete de servicios digital?
Seleccione “Yes”, “No” o “I don’t know”.
3 Compruebe cómo se han insertado los canales.
Seleccione cómo su caja del cable actual inserta los canales
de 2, 3 y 4 cifras.
4 La marca de la caja del cable
5 El código de la señal IR
Asegúrese de que caja del cable esté ajustada para el canal
que aparece en la pantalla y luego pulse [ENTER].
–Si la caja del cable ha sido cambiada al canal 09, seleccione
“Yes”.
–Si todavía la caja del cable está ajustada al mismo canal,
seleccione “No”.
Cuando selecciona “DirecTV”, ajuste lo siguiente:
1 Canal de conexión del receptor de satélite
(“RF, Channel 2”/ “RF, Channel 3”/ “RF, Channel 4”/ “IN3”)
2 Compruebe cómo se han insertado los canales.
Seleccione cómo su caja del cable corriente inserta los
canales de 2, 3 y 4 cifras.
3 La marca de su receptor de satélite
4 El código de la señal IR
Encienda su receptor de satélite y luego pulse [ENTER].
Si está viendo DirecTV en un aspecto de 4:3 con el panel
lateral, ajuste este panel a “Desactivado” en el receptor
DirecTV con el objeto de recibir correctamente los datos
TV Guide On ScreenTM.
–Si cambia la visualización del canal, entonces seleccione
“Yes”.
–Si todavía el receptor de satélite está ajustado al mismo
canal, seleccione “No”.
Cuando selecciona “DISH Network”, ajuste lo siguiente:
≥Canal de conexión del receptor de satélite
7 Confirme los ajustes.
–Si la información es correcta, seleccione “Yes, continue setup
process”.
–Si la información no es correcta, seleccione “No, repeat setup
process” para iniciar de nuevo el ajuste.
8 Pulse [ENTER].
Según el equipo que conecta va a aparecer una de las
siguientes imágenes.
Pantalla “Ajuste automático del canal/reloj”
≥Pulse [ENTER].
Pantalla “Ajuste manual del reloj”
1 Pulse [2, 1] para seleccionar el elemento que quiere
cambiar y luego pulse [3, 4] para cambiar el ajuste.
2 Pulse [ENTER].
Se visualiza o una pantalla de recepción televisiva o una pantalla
con el fondo azul. Inicia el reloj.
9 Pulse [Í DVD POWER]. (La unidad se apaga, luego espere
24 horas.)
: Pulse [TV GUIDE].
Si encuentra “TV Guide On Screen Setup Progress” visualizado
en el televisor, la unidad no ha descargado todavía los datos TV
Guide On ScreenTM.
Para actualizar los datos
Deje la unidad en el modo de espera cuando no la usa. Ella
descargará los datos necesarios para conservar los listados de
programas mientras que está en el modo de espera.
Si pulsa [TV GUIDE] y aparece
la pantalla a la derecha,
entonces la unidad no podrá
lograr los datos durante 3 días o
más.
? ????????????????????????????????????????????
? ?????????????????????????????????????????????
? ?????????????????????????????????????
? ?????????????????????????????????????????????
? ???????????????????????????????????????????
? ???????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????
? ? ?????????????????
????????????????
??????????????????
Exit Guide
Stop Search
Timer Recording
Change System Settings
Exit Guide:
Volver a la pantalla de recepción televisiva.
Stop Search:
Parar la descarga de los datos.
Search Again:
Reiniciar la descarga de los datos cuando se
ha parado.
Timer Recording:
Ajuste manualmente para la grabación programada.
Change System
Settings:
Restablezca los ajustes de la guía TV.
Español
EH55English.book Page 81 Thursday, April 6, 2006
RQT8365
81
EH55English.book Page 82 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Grabación de programas de televisión
Consulte la referencia de los controles en la page 81.
≥[HDD] Puede grabar hasta 500 títulos en la HDD.
≥[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] Puede grabar hasta 99 títulos en un disco.
≥[+R] [+RW] Puede grabar hasta 49 títulos en un disco.
Uso del sistema TV Guide On ScreenTM
para hacer grabaciones programadas
Preparación
≥Encienda el televisor y seleccione la entrada de vídeo apropiada a
las conexiones de esta unidad.
≥Encienda esta unidad.
1 Pulse [DRIVE SELECT] para seleccionar la
unidad HDD o DVD.
2 Si ha seleccionado la unidad DVD
Pulse [< OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal
para abrir la bandeja e insertar un disco.
Puede realizar fácilmente una grabación programada sólo marcando
el/los programa/s deseado/s en los listados de programas.
≥Puede insertar con hasta 8 días de antemano.
≥El nombre del programa se convierte en el nombre del título
grabado por si el programa se encuentra detallado en los listados
de programas.
1 Pulse [TV GUIDE].
Menú
SCHEDULE
8:00
≥Para cerrar la bandeja pulse de nuevo el botón.
∫ Disco sin cartucho
LISTINGS
TODAY
8:00PM
SEARCH
8:30
INFO
8:30PM
R Graba regularmente.
NTV
∫ Disco con cartucho
Marca y frecuencia de
grabación
Graba una sola vez.
Channel
pTV
TV
Insértelo con la cara impresa
hacia arriba.
W Graba semanalmente.
Desactivado
NWBG
ducation
BOX
ANiMe
Network
PBS
2 Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar el programa.
≥Para saltar una pantalla
Pulse [PAGE W] o [PAGE X].
Insértelo etiqueta
arriba con la flecha
hacia adentro.
Insértelo a tope
3 Pulse [¥ REC].
“
” aparece en la lista para indicar que el programa está
ajustado para la grabación programada.
Pulse [¥ REC] para cambiar la frecuencia.(➡ arriba, Marca y
frecuencia de grabación)
Repita los pasos de 2 a 3 para programar otras grabaciones.
3 Pulse [W X CH] para seleccionar el canal.
Para seleccionar con los botones numéricos:
Modo antena
CableTV, Canal del satélite
Ej.,
5:
15:
[0] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [5]
Ej.,
5:
15:
115:
1115:
4 Pulse [TV GUIDE].
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
4 Pulse [REC MODE] para seleccionar el modo de
grabación. (XP, SP, LP o EP)
5 Pulse [¥ REC] para empezar a grabar.
La grabación se hará en el espacio vacío de la HDD o del disco.
Los datos no se escribirán encima de otros.
≥Durante la grabación no se puede cambiar el canal ni el modo
de grabación. Durante la pausa puede cambiar el canal o el
modo de grabación; pero la grabación tendrá entonces un título
distinto.
Para especificar un tiempo para detener la grabación
Durante la grabación
Pulse [¥ REC] para seleccionar el tiempo de grabación.
Para hacer una pausa en la grabación
Pulse [;].
Pulse de nuevo para reiniciar la grabación.
(El título no se divide en títulos distintos.)
Vuelve a la pantalla del televisor.
≥La unidad pasa a la espera de la grabación programada (“F”
se enciende en el visualizador de la unidad); sin embargo, él no
se apaga automáticamente. Para ahorrar corriente, la unidad se
apaga pulsando [Í DVD POWER].
Para cancelar la grabación programada cuando ésta ya ha
empezado
1 Pulse [DRIVE SELECT] para seleccionar la unidad de grabación.
2 Pulse [∫] luego pulse [2, 1] para seleccionar “Parar grabación”
y por fin pulse [ENTER].
Reproducción mientras usted está grabando
[HDD] [RAM]
Puede reproducir desde el comienzo del título
Reproducción
que está grabando.
de persecución
Pulse [1] (PLAY) durante la grabación.
Grabación y
reproducción
simultáneas
Para detener la grabación
Pulse [∫].
La sección desde que empieza hasta que termina la grabación es
un título.
Mientras va grabando puede reproducir un título
grabado anteriormente.
1 Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] durante la
grabación.
2 Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar un
título y luego pulse [ENTER].
≥Para salir de la pantalla DIRECT NAVIGATOR
Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Para detener la reproducción
Pulse [∫].
Para detener la grabación
(2 segundos después de parar la reproducción) Pulse [∫].
Modos de grabación y tiempos de grabación aproximados
Dependiendo del contenido que está siendo grabado, los tiempos de grabación pueden ser inferiores a los indicados.
(Los tiempos proporcionados en este diagrama son una estimación).
HDD
(200 GB)
Un solo lado
(4,7 GB)
DVD-RAM
Dos lados§1
(9,4 GB)
DVD-R
DVD-RW, +R
+RW (4,7 GB)
DVD-R DL §3
(8,5 GB)
+R DL §3
(8,5 GB)
XP (Modo de grabación de alta
calidad de imagen)
44 h
1h
2h
1h
1 h 45 min
1 h 45 min
SP (Modo de grabación estándar)
89 h
2h
4h
2h
3 h 35 min
3 h 35 min
LP (Modo de grabación larga)
177 h
4h
8h
4h
7 h 10 min
7 h 10 min
Modo de grabación
RQT8365
82
16 h
8h
14 h 20 min
No se puede
8h
EP (Modo de grabación extra
355 h (266 h§2)
copiar
(12 h§2)
(6 h§2)
( 10 h 45 min§2)
(6 h§2)
larga)§4
§1 No es posible grabar o reproducir continuamente desde una cara a la otra en un disco de dos caras.
§2 Cuando “Tiempo de grab. en el modo EP” está ajustado en “EP (6H)” en el menú CONFIGURACIÓN.
La calidad del sonido es mejor cuando se utiliza “EP (6H)” que cuando se utiliza “EP (8H)”.
§3 No puede grabar directamente en estos discos con esta unidad. La tabla muestra el tiempo de grabación cuando copia.
§4 Al grabar a la HDD en el modo FR (grabaciones de 5 horas o más) o en el modo EP, no puede realizar copias a alta velocidad en los discos
+R, +R DL o +RW.
EH55English.book Page 83 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Reproducción
Consulte la referencia de los controles en la page 81.
Reproducción de vídeo grabado/
Reproducción de discos de sola reproducción
Preparación
≥Encienda el televisor y seleccione la entrada de vídeo apropiada a
las conexiones de esta unidad.
≥Encienda esta unidad.
1 Pulse [DRIVE SELECT] para seleccionar la
unidad HDD o DVD.
2 Si seleccionó la unidad DVD
Pulse [< OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal
para abrir la bandeja e insertar un disco.
Para cerrar la bandeja pulse de nuevo el botón.
3 Pulse [1] (PLAY).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
La reproducción empieza desde el título grabado más recientemente.
[DVD-V] [DVD-A] [CD] [VCD] y MP3
La reproducción empieza desde el comienzo del disco.
∫ Selección de programas grabados (títulos) para
reproducir–DIRECT NAVIGATOR
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
1 Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]. DIRECT NAVIGATOR Vista título
Vídeo
Imagen
HDD
2 [HDD] [RAM]
Pulse el botón “A” para
seleccionar “Vídeo”.
3 Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para
seleccionar el título y luego
pulse [ENTER].
También puede seleccionar títulos con los botones numéricos.
[HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Ej., 5:
[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] Ej.,
5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
A
007
008
10 10/27 Lun
8 10/27 Lun
---
---
B
---
---
Mantenga pulsado [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
La velocidad de reproducción es superior a la normal.
≥Pulse de nuevo para volver a la velocidad normal.
Durante la pausa, pulse [6] o [5].
Cámara
La velocidad aumenta hasta 5 pasos.
≥Pulse [1] (PLAY) para reiniciar la reproducción.
lenta§2
≥[VCD] Dirección de avance [5] solamente.
Durante la pausa, pulse [2] (2;) o [1] (;1).
De cuadro Cada pulsación muestra el cuadro siguiente.
≥Mantenga pulsado para cambiar en orden avance o
en
retroceso.
§2
cuadro
≥Pulse [1] (PLAY) para reiniciar la reproducción.
≥[VCD] Dirección de avance [1] (;1) solamente.
1 Pulse [TIME SLIP].
Salto del
2 Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar el tiempo y luego
tiempo
pulse [ENTER].
especificado La reproducción salta el tiempo especificado.
(Time
≥Cada vez que pulsa [3, 4], el tiempo aumenta [3] o
disminuye [4] en intervalos de 1 minuto. (Mantenga
Slip)§3
pulsado para cambiar a intervalos de 10-minutos.)
Pulse [CM SKIP].
Salto
Cada vez que lo pulsa, la reproducción empieza
CM§3
aproximadamente 1 minuto después.
Quick
View§1
[HDD] [RAM]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[DVD-A] (Partes de imagen móvil solamente) [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
§3 [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
§1
§2
Reproducción de imágenes fijas
Cuando parpadee el indicador de tarjeta (“SD”) en el visualizador de la
unidad, la tarjeta estará siendo leída o se estará escribiendo en ella.
No apague la unidad ni saque la tarjeta. Esto puede causar un fallo en
el funcionamiento o hacer que se pierda el contenido de la tarjeta.
Inserción de la tarjeta
Presione en el centro de la tarjeta
hasta que quede colocada
haciendo un ruido seco.
Extracción de la tarjeta
1 Presione el centro
de la tarjeta.
2 Tire de ella recta.
Para salir de la pantalla
Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
∫ Cuando aparece una pantalla de menú en el televisor
≥Para volver a la pantalla de menú
[DVD-V] Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] o [SUB MENU].
[DVD-A] Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[VCD] Pulse [RETURN].
Operaciones durante la reproducción
Parada
Pausa
Búsqueda
Salto
Inicio desde
un elemento
seleccionado
Pulse [∫].
La posición de detención se memoriza.
Función de reanudación de la reproducción
Pulse [1] (PLAY) para reiniciar la reproducción desde
esta posición.
Pulse [;].
Pulse de nuevo [;] o [1] (PLAY) para reiniciar la reproducción.
Pulse [6] o [5].
≥La velocidad aumenta hasta 5 pasos.
([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] hasta 3 pasos)
≥Pulse [1] (PLAY) para reiniciar la reproducción.
Durante la reproducción o la pausa, pulse [:] o [9].
Salte al título, capítulo o pista que quiera reproducir.
≥Cada pulsación aumenta el número de saltos.
Pulse los botones numéricos.
La reproducción empieza desde el título, capítulo o
pista seleccionado.
≥[HDD] MP3 y JPEG/TIFF
Ej.,, 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
≥[DVD-A] Selección de grupo
Durante la parada (el salva pantallas se visualiza en
el televiso)
Ej., 5:
[5]
≥Otros discos (Puede seleccionar la pista con DVD-Audio.)
Ej.,, 5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
≥Esto sólo funciona durante la parada con algunos
discos (el salvapantallas se visualiza en el televisor).
Introduzca la tarjeta con la
etiqueta hacia arriba y la esquina
recortada hacia la derecha.
Mientras está parada, inserte la tarjeta en su ranura y
automáticamente se visualiza el menú (➡ abajo). Pulse [3, 4] para
seleccionar “Ir a vista álbum”, luego pulse [ENTER] para visualizar la
pantalla de Vista álbum mostrada en el paso 2.
Operaciones de la tarjeta SD.
Tarjeta SD insertada.
Seleccione una acción o pulse RETURN.
Ir a vista álbum
Copiar Imágenes
Copiar vídeo (MPEG2)
ENTER
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]
[CD] [con imágenes fijas (JPEG/TIFF)]
1 Pulse [DRIVE SELECT] para seleccionar la
unidad HDD, DVD o SD.
2 Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
([HDD] [RAM] Pulse el botón “B” para seleccionar “Imagen”)
([CD] Vaya al paso 4)
Para mostrar otras páginas
Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar “Atrás” o “Avanza” y luego
pulse [ENTER].
≥También puede pulsar [:, 9] para mostrar otras páginas.
3 Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar el álbum y
luego pulse [ENTER].
4 Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar la imagen
fija y luego pulse [ENTER].
≥Pulse [2, 1] para visualizar la imagen fija anterior o siguiente.
Español
[DVD-V] [DVD-A]
Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar el elemento y luego pulse
[ENTER].
Algunos elementos también se pueden seleccionar con los botones
numéricos.
[VCD]
Pulse los botones numéricos para seleccionar el elemento.
Ej., 5:
[0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]
Para volver a la pantalla de Vista de álbum o Imágenes (JPEG)
Pulse [RETURN].
Para salir de la pantalla
Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT8365
83
EH55English.book Page 84 Thursday, April 6, 2006
9:28 PM
Index
Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio
Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving, recording . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
42
61
38
27
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Channel
Adjusting, hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Auto Channel Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Captions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
CHANNEL EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
VCR Plusr Channel Setting . . . . . . 65
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 44
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Clock setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 64
CM Skip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connection
Amplifier, system component . . 18, 19
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–16, 18
Cable box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
IN2 input terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
IR Blaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 16
Television. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14–19
Video cassette recorder. . . . 14–16, 53
Copy
SD card (MPEG2 moving picture) . . 52
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Title/playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 45
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Delete
Album. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 47
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Delete Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Dialog Enhancer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . . 36, 40, 44, 48
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
DivX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 39, 76
DNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DPOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 76
DV camcorder recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW,
+R, +R DL, +RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment—Finalize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Finalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 76
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 76
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . . . . . . 25
FUNCTIONS window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 63, 76
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 76
Language
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 76
Menu
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
On-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 40
Name
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Noise reduction (NR)
DNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Line-in NR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
On-screen
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
PCM Down Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 77
Properties
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
In the United States, TV Guide, VCR Plus+, PlusCode, and other
related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide
International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. In Canada, TV Guide,
VCR Plus+, and PlusCode are registered marks of Transcontinental
Inc., and are used under license by Gemstar-TV Guide International,
Inc.
The TV Guide On Screen and VCR Plusr systems are
manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide International,
Inc. and/or one of its affiliates.
The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more of the
following issued United States patents 5,307,173; 5,335,079;
4,908,713; 4,751,578; 4,706,121; 6,498,895, 6,418,556, 6,331,877;
6,239,794; 6,154,203; 5,940,073; 4,908,713; 4,751,578; 4,706,121.
One Panasonic Way Secaucus,
New Jersey 07094
http://www.panasonic.com
C 2006 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Printed in China
Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Recording
DV camcorder recording . . . . . . . . . .53
Flexible Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Scheduled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28–30, 32
Recording for High-Speed Copying. . . .61
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Reminder
Scheduled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Restore Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 16
Scheduled recording . . . . . . . . . .28–30, 32
SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 10, 76
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Shorten Title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Signal Source (RF IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . . .27
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Still pictures
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
TIFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7, 77
Time Slip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
TV Guide On ScreenTM . . . . . . . . .20, 28, 31
TV Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
VCR Plusi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
VCR Plusi Channel Setting . . . . . . .60, 65
V. Surround Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its
related affiliates are not in any way liable for the
accuracy or availability of the program schedule
information or other data in the TV Guide On Screen
system and cannot guarantee service availability in
your area. In no event shall Gemstar-TV Guide
International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates be liable
for any damages in connection with the accuracy or
availability of the program schedule information or
other data in the TV Guide On Screen system.
-If you see this symbolInformation on Disposal in other Countries outside the
European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your
local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct
method of disposal.
[For\U.S.A.]
Panasonic Consumer Electronics
Company, Division of Panasonic
Corporation of North America
Protection
Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
[For\Canada]
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.
Panasonic Canada Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5
San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina,
Puerto Rico 00985
5770 Ambler Drive
Mississauga, Ontario
L4W 2T3
www.panasonic.ca
pr
RQT8365-P
F0406SN0
Download PDF

advertising